1. society
2. work
3. contracts

PROJECT
MANUAL
for
Oakmont Gardens
Interior Renovations
330011 W
Whhiittee O
Oaakk D
Drriivvee
S
Saannttaa R
Roossaa,, C
Caalliiffoorrnniiaa
M
MB
BK
KS
Seen
niio
orr L
Liivviin
ng
g
PLAN CHECK RESUBMITTAL
April 28, 2014
Architect's Project No. 13.010
Prepared by:
Sh elt e rLL P
P.O. Box 2319
Pasadena, CA 91102
(213) 290-3220
00 0110
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
00 0101
PROJECT MANUAL TITLE PAGE
00 0110
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 1000
SUMMARY
01 2500
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01 2600
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01 3100
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 3200
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
01 3300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 4000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 4200
REFERENCES
01 5000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 6000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 7300
EXECUTION
01 7700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 7823
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 7839
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01 7900
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 4119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DIVISIONS 03 TO 05
(Not Used)
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 0110 - 1
DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 1000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1053
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 2013
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 2023
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 4023
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 8413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
07 9200
JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS
08 1113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 1416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 1433
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
08 3113
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08 7100
DOOR HARDWARE
08 8000
GLAZING
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
09 2900
GYPSUM BOARD
09 3000
TILING
09 6500
RESILIENT FLOORING
09 6816
SHEET CARPETING
09 7200
WALL COVERINGS
09 9100
PAINTING
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
10 2800
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
11 4000
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
12 3600
COUNTERTOPS
DIVISIONS 13 AND 14
(Not Used)
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 0110 - 2
FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
(Not Used)
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
22 0400
PLUMBING
DIVISIONS 23 TO 25
(Not Used)
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 0510
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 0515
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
27 1500
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
(Not Used)
SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP
(Not Used)
PROCESS EQUIPMENT SUBGROUP
(Not Used)
END OF DOCUMENT
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 0110 - 3
SECTION 01 1000
SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Project information.
Work covered by Contract Documents.
Owner-furnished products.
Access to site.
Work restrictions.
Specification and drawing conventions.
PROJECT INFORMATION
A.
Project Identification: Oakmont Gardens Interior Renovations.
1.
Project Location: Santa Rosa, California.
B.
Owner: MBK Santa Rosa MSL, LLC
C.
Architect: ShelterLLP; PO Box 2319; Pasadena, California 91102.
1.4
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of remodel
construction.
B.
Type of Contract: Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
1.5
OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A.
Owner will furnish products indicated in the Owner/Contractor Agreement. The Work includes
receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products as
required.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SUMMARY
01 1000 - 1
1.6
ACCESS TO SITE
A.
General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during
construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform
work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
B.
Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb
portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1.7
WORK RESTRICTIONS
A.
Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. Comply with
limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours
permitted by governing authorities and to hours agreed upon with Owner.
C.
Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and
vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.
D.
Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted.
E.
Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project
site is not permitted.
1.8
SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1.
2.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The
words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
otherwise.
B.
Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work
of all Sections in the Specifications.
C.
Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are
described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to
identify materials and products:
1.
2.
Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in
the individual Specifications Sections.
Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations and scheduled on
Drawings.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SUMMARY
01 1000 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SUMMARY
01 1000 - 3
SECTION 01 2500
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Section 01 6000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable
product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or
unavailability of required warranty terms.
Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not
required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to
Contractor or Owner.
Owner "Substitution Request" form must be included with all requests.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
2.
Substitution Request Form: Request and use form provided by Owner.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be
provided, if applicable.
Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other
parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01 2500 - 1
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
3.
1.5
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work
specified.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,
from ICC-ES.
Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in
delivery.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible
with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce
indicated results.
Architect's Action:
If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution
with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility
tests recommended by manufacturers.
PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved
substitutions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for
change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related
submittals.
1.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01 2500 - 2
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
B.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within
60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be
considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.
1.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities
Owner must assume.
Owner's additional responsibilities may include
compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of
other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01 2500 - 3
SECTION 01 2600
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Section 01 2500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling
requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A.
1.4
Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on form included in Project
Manual.
PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A.
Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1.
2.
Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop
work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
Within time specified in Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost
adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the
change.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey
data to substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
Quotation Form: Use forms provided by Owner. Sample copies are included in
Project Manual.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01 2600 - 1
B.
Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim with prior written approval from Owner, by submitting a
request for a change to Architect.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.5
Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
Comply with requirements in Section 01 2500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
Proposal Request Form: Use form provided by Owner.
ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS
A.
Allowance Adjustment: See Section 01 21 00 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for
preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of
allowances.
B.
Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 01 2200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for
preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured
scope of unit-price work.
1.6
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A.
On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Owner will issue a Change Order
for signatures of Owner and Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01 2600 - 2
SECTION 01 3100
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
General coordination procedures.
Partnering.
Coordination drawings.
Requests for Information (RFIs).
Project meetings.
Section 01 3200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting
Contractor's construction schedule.
Section 01 7300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and fieldengineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or
clarifications of the Contract Documents.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key
personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project
site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone
numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses.
Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the
absence of individuals assigned to Project.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 3100 - 1
1.
1.5
Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.
1.
C.
Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of
the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.6
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
Preparation of the schedule of values.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Preinstallation conferences.
Project closeout activities.
Startup and adjustment of systems.
PARTNERING
A.
A formal partnering process between Owner and Contractor is required. Partnering is a
collaborative effort and a long-term commitment between two or more organizations for the
purpose of achieving specific project objective by maximizing the efficiency and effectiveness of
each organization's participation in meeting specific project requirements. This effectiveness
requires changing traditional "individualized" relationships to "shared culture" relationships
without regard to organizational boundaries. The partnering relationship is based upon trust,
dedication to common goals, understanding of each other’s individual expectations and values,
and a full commitment to success. Benefits include improved communications, efficiency and
cost effectiveness, increased opportunity for innovation, and the continuous improvement of
product quality and services.
B.
The Owner's partnering process applies these concepts to the delivery of new facilities. By
using partnering in this Contract, the Owner seeks to maximize the opportunity to achieve
success measured by how well the Project meets the operational requirements, financial
constraints, schedule constraints, safety, quality, functional requirements, and the employment
of appropriate levels of risk management throughout the Project.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 3100 - 2
1.7
COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A.
Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in
individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop
Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is
required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than
one entity.
1.
Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to
indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed
data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
B.
Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings.
Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of
various systems and components.
Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated
replacement of components during the life of the installation.
Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,
valves, and other controls.
Indicate required installation sequences.
Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that
appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance
requirements.
Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed
resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will
not be considered changes to the Contract.
Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and
mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of
visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan
drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.
Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical
and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to
accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict
between light fixtures and other components.
Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans
and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical
equipment.
Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of
embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles,
door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and
similar items.
Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:
a.
b.
c.
7.
Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including
insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.
Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access
doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.
Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.
Electrical Work: Show the following:
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 3100 - 3
a.
b.
c.
d.
8.
9.
10.
1.8
Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit.
Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other firealarm locations.
Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor
control center locations.
Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.
Fire-Protection System: Show locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe
drops, and sprinkler heads.
Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being
coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's
responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared
in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor,
who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.
Coordination Drawing Prints:
Prepare coordination drawing prints according to
requirements in Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures."
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A.
General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the
Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1.
2.
B.
Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor
with no response.
Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Project name.
Project number.
Date.
Name of Contractor.
Name of Architect.
RFI number, numbered sequentially.
RFI subject.
Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the
Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
Contractor's signature.
Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data,
Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe
items needing interpretation.
a.
Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected
materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
C.
RFI Forms: Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
D.
Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.
Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect
after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 3100 - 4
1.
The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures."
a.
E.
Project name.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of Architect.
RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
RFI description.
Date the RFI was submitted.
Date Architect's response was received.
On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor
disagrees with response.
1.
2.
1.9
If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI
response.
RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
Requests for approval of submittals.
Requests for approval of substitutions.
Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
Meeting Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant
discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone
concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 3100 - 5
B.
Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before
starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days
after execution of the Agreement.
1.
2.
3.
Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority,
Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;
suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the
conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to
the Work.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
4.
C.
Tentative construction schedule.
Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
Designation of key personnel and their duties.
Lines of communications.
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
Procedures for RFIs.
Procedures for testing and inspecting.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
Submittal procedures.
Preparation of record documents.
Use of the premises.
Work restrictions.
Working hours.
Owner's occupancy requirements.
Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
Procedures for moisture and mold control.
Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
Construction waste management and recycling.
Parking availability.
Office, work, and storage areas.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
First aid.
Security.
Progress cleaning.
Meeting Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute
meeting minutes.
Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1.
2.
Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect,
and Owner's Commissioning Authority of scheduled meeting dates.
Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Contract Documents.
Related RFIs.
Related Change Orders.
Deliveries.
Submittals.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 3100 - 6
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Review of mockups.
Possible conflicts.
Compatibility requirements.
Time schedules.
Weather limitations.
Manufacturer's written instructions.
Warranty requirements.
Compatibility of materials.
Acceptability of substrates.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Space and access limitations.
Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
Testing and inspecting requirements.
Installation procedures.
Coordination with other work.
Required performance results.
Protection of adjacent work.
Protection of construction and personnel.
Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
required corrective measures and actions.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties
requiring information.
Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time
convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of
Substantial Completion.
1.
2.
3.
Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project
closeout.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority,
Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;
suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the
meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the
Work.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout,
including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Preparation of record documents.
Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final
inspection for acceptance.
Submittal of written warranties.
Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.
Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.
Requirements for demonstration and training.
Preparation of Contractor's punch list.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and
for final payment.
Submittal procedures.
Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.
Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 3100 - 7
4.
E.
Meeting Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals.
1.
2.
3.
Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority
and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with
current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities
shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar
with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind
schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how
construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties
involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that
current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1)
b.
Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
4.
Review schedule for next period.
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
Status of correction of deficient items.
Field observations.
Status of RFIs.
Status of proposal requests.
Pending changes.
Status of Change Orders.
Pending claims and disputes.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
Meeting Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute
the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a.
Schedule Updating: In addition to Owner/Contractor agreement provisions, revise
Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to
the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently
with the report of each meeting.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 3100 - 8
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 3100 - 9
SECTION 01 3200
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Startup construction schedule.
Contractor's construction schedule.
Construction schedule updating reports.
Site condition reports.
Special reports.
Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and
inspections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1.
2.
Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned
early start and finish times.
Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B.
CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project
where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine
when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
C.
Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D.
Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
E.
Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1.
2.
Float time belongs to Owner.
Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the
early start of the successor activity.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
APRIL 28, 2014
SANTA ROSA, CA
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
SHELTER LLP
01 3200 - 1
3.
F.
1.4
Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely
affecting the planned Project completion date.
Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of
an activity as scheduled.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1.
2.
Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.
Two paper copies.
B.
Startup construction schedule.
C.
Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction
period. Show logic ties for activities.
D.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule
for entire construction period.
1.
E.
Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to
comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and
date on label.
CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for
each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource
loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date,
late finish date, and total float in calendar days.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or
actual start date if known.
Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in
ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if
known.
Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from commencement of the
Work until most recent Application for Payment.
F.
Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
G.
Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
H.
Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.
I.
Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and
reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's
request.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
APRIL 28, 2014
SANTA ROSA, CA
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
SHELTER LLP
01 3200 - 2
B.
Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.6
Review software limitations and content and format for reports.
Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.
Discuss constraints, including work stages area separations interim milestones and
partial Owner occupancy.
Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.
Review submittal requirements and procedures.
Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.
Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting
agencies.
Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures, including
commissioning activities.
Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.
Review procedures for updating schedule.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B.
Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts,
submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and
reports.
1.
2.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities
involved.
Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of
final completion in the Owner/Contractor agreement.
1.
B.
Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows
an early or extended completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order in
compliance agreement terms and conditions.
Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1.
2.
Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 15 days.
Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and
major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule.
Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals,
purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
APRIL 28, 2014
SANTA ROSA, CA
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
SHELTER LLP
01 3200 - 3
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Submittal Review Time:
Include review and resubmittal times indicated in
Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times
in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.
Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.
Substantial Completion:
Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch
list items and final completion.
Inspections, wet and dry utility connection and activation, other items that impact in any
way the timely completion of the Work.
Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1.
2.
Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include
delivery date indicated in Section 01 1000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate
the earliest possible delivery date.
Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Coordination with existing construction.
Use of premises restrictions.
Environmental control.
Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of
the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be
sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Structural completion.
Completion of mechanical installation.
Completion of electrical installation.
Substantial Completion.
D.
Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, final completion and other as
required by Owner/Contractor agreement.
E.
Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs.
On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and
actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.
F.
Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or
commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Unresolved issues.
Unanswered Requests for Information.
Rejected or unreturned submittals.
Notations on returned submittals.
Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.
Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days
behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means
by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to
working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and
date by which recovery will be accomplished.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
APRIL 28, 2014
SANTA ROSA, CA
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
SHELTER LLP
01 3200 - 4
2.2
STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within
seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
B.
Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities. Include
diagram for the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
2.3
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)
A.
General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.
B.
CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM network
analysis diagram for the Work.
1.
Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be
accepted for use as established by Owner/Contractor agreement.
a.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not
excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates,
regardless of Owner's approval of the schedule.
Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including
subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule
information.
Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting
progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.
Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days
and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time.
CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using
the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.
1.
Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship
of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the
following activities:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
3.
Preparation and processing of submittals.
Mobilization and demobilization.
Purchase of materials.
Delivery.
Fabrication.
Utility interruptions.
Installation.
Testing and commissioning.
Punch list and final completion.
Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim
completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with
Contract milestone dates.
Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled
network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as
necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
APRIL 28, 2014
SANTA ROSA, CA
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
SHELTER LLP
01 3200 - 5
4.
Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate
paths with most float near the edges. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible
for activities clearly off the critical path.
D.
Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect
of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.
E.
Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating
straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
F.
Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports
showing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
Identification of activities that have changed.
Changes in early and late start dates.
Changes in early and late finish dates.
Changes in activity durations in workdays.
Changes in the critical path.
Changes in total float or slack time.
Changes in the Contract Time.
Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.
Description of activity.
Main events of activity.
Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
Early and late start dates.
Early and late finish dates.
Activity duration in workdays.
Total float or slack time.
Average size of workforce.
Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).
In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar
value.
In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative
dollar value.
In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed
as of list date.
Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with
progress meetings.
REPORTS
A.
Site Condition Reports: Prepare and submit a detailed report immediately upon discovery of a
difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents.
1.
2.
Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations
for changing the Contract Documents.
Submit with Request for Interpretation (RFI).
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
APRIL 28, 2014
SANTA ROSA, CA
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
SHELTER LLP
01 3200 - 6
2.5
SPECIAL REPORTS
A.
General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute
copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B.
Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at
Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report.
List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of
results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these
events are known or predictable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: In accordance with Owner/Contractor agreement
and as additionally required at monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction
progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress
meeting.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, testing and inspecting
agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.
1.
2.
Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in
the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their
assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction
activities.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
APRIL 28, 2014
SANTA ROSA, CA
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
SHELTER LLP
01 3200 - 7
SECTION 01 3300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Section 01 3200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.
Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
Section 01 7839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
Section 01 7900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of
demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual
Specification Sections as "action submittals", and as specified in Owner/Contractor agreement.
B.
Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with
requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification
Sections as "informational submittals."
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and
reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1.
2.
Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and
Contractor's construction schedule.
Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include
submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required
to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead
time for manufacture or fabrication.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 3300 - 1
3.
Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
construction schedule.
a.
4.
Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
1.5
Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing
for submittals.
Scheduled date for first submittal.
Specification Section number and title.
Submittal category: Action; informational.
Name of subcontractor.
Description of the Work covered.
Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
Scheduled date of fabrication.
Scheduled dates for purchasing.
Scheduled dates for installation.
Activity or event number.
SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be
provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless
partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification
Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a.
C.
Architect and Owner reserve the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the
Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of
the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Duplicate copies of all submittals and re-submittals are to be provided in digital format to
Owner, concurrently with submittal/re-submittal to Architect.
Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals
may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 3300 - 2
days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being
returned to Contractor.
D.
Paper Submittals:
identification.
1.
2.
3.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Project name.
Date.
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
Name of subcontractor.
Name of supplier.
Name of manufacturer.
Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1)
i.
j.
k.
l.
4.
Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01).
Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point
(e.g., 061000.01.A).
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
Other necessary identification.
Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and
unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents,
initial submittal may serve as final submittal.
a.
5.
Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for
Submit one copy of submittal to Owner and concurrent reviewer in addition to
specified number of copies to Architect.
Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately
for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect
will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.
a.
Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use facsimile of sample form included in
Project Manual.
E.
Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
F.
Deviations and Additional Information:
On an attached separate sheet, prepared on
Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than
those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the
Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification
information as related submittal.
G.
Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 3300 - 3
1.
2.
3.
Note date and content of previous submittal.
Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action
stamp.
H.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
I.
Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final
action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by
individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification
Sections.
1.
2.
3.
Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will return two copies.
Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will not return copies.
Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
a.
b.
B.
Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted
certificates and certifications where indicated.
Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications
where indicated.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1.
2.
3.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
Testing by recognized testing agency.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
Notation of coordination requirements.
For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 3300 - 4
b.
5.
6.
C.
Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
Submit four paper copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated; Architect will
return three copies.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1.
Duplicate copies of all shop drawing submittals and re-submittals are to be provided in
digital format to Owner, concurrently with submittal/re-submittal to Architect.
2.
Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents.
following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
4.
D.
Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
Include the
Identification of products.
Schedules.
Compliance with specified standards.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
Format: Four opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return three copies.
Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1.
2.
Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories
together in one submittal package.
Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a.
4.
Generic description of Sample.
Product name and name of manufacturer.
Sample source.
Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 3300 - 5
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent
testing and inspection.
a.
Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two
Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample
set as a project record sample.
1)
2)
E.
Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to
be demonstrated.
If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of
paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary
indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the
following information in tabular form:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract
Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
Number and name of room or space.
Location within room or space.
Format: Three paper copies of product schedule or list unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies.
F.
Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 3100
"Project Management and Coordination."
G.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 3200
"Construction Progress Documentation."
H.
Application for Payment and Schedule of Values:
Section 01 2900 "Payment Procedures."
I.
Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements."
J.
Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified
in Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures."
K.
Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 7823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
L.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
M.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and
personnel certified.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
Comply with requirements specified in
APRIL 28, 2014
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 3300 - 6
N.
Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
O.
Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
P.
Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q.
Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
R.
Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
S.
Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
T.
Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
U.
Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
V.
Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for
compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
W.
Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
2.2
DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A.
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1.
B.
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a
written request for additional information to Architect.
Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other
required submittals, submit three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 3300 - 7
responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to
Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1.
Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with
other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01 7700
"Closeout Procedures."
C.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and
will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.
B.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return
it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate
party.
C.
Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial
submittals has received prior approval from Architect.
D.
Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
for resubmittal without review.
E.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without
action.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 3300 - 8
SECTION 01 4000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities
are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those
Sections may also cover production of standard products.
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, Commissioning Authority, or authorities having jurisdiction are not
limited by provisions of this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements.
Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C.
Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site will be required for building
envelope including WRB, penetrations, fenestration, cladding, colors and other components as
requested by Owner, Architect or governing authorities to establish conformance with design
intent and product performance. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under
Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials
and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between
dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances.
Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the
standard by which the Work will be judged.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 4000 - 1
D.
Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with
specified criteria.
E.
Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
F.
Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.
G.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
H.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I.
Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1.
J.
1.4
Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that
requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully
completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;
being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels,
comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different,
but apparently equal, to Architect and Owner for a decision before proceeding.
B.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect and Owner for a
decision before proceeding.
1.5
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations,
indicating materials and size of mockup construction.
1.
2.
Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.
Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 4000 - 2
1.6
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.7
Specification Section number and title.
Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
Description of test and inspection.
Identification of applicable standards.
Identification of test and inspection methods.
Number of tests and inspections required.
Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
Requirements for obtaining samples.
Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN
A.
Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of, and not less than
five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Owner. Identify
personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out
Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's
construction schedule.
B.
Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and
experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures
similar in nature and extent to those required for Project. Project quality-control manager may
also serve as Project superintendent.
C.
Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through
review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible
for submittal review.
D.
Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work
requiring testing or inspection, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and
inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and
inspections.
Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the
"Statement of Special Inspections."
Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents, including
tests and inspections indicated to be performed by the Commissioning Authority.
E.
Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during
construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and
inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into
compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved
mockups.
F.
Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of
approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 4000 - 3
defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with
requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.8
REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A.
Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports:
Prepare written information
documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.
Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting
manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative
making report.
Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 4000 - 4
1.9
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
D.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent
to those indicated for this Project.
F.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1.
2.
NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program.
G.
Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation
of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
H.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
I.
Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing
for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the
following:
1.
Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a.
b.
c.
Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.
Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory
mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with
performance requirements.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 4000 - 5
d.
e.
2.
J.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection,
and similar quality-assurance service to Architect and Commissioning Authority, with
copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether
tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect and Owner.
Notify Architect and Owner seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will
be constructed.
Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers
that will be employed during the construction at Project.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Architect's and Owner’s approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or
construction.
a.
b.
6.
7.
1.10
A.
Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
When governing authority approvals are required additional review time may be
required and should be anticipated in scheduled approval time.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed by Owner.
QUALITY CONTROL
Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods
of construction indicated for the completed Work.
When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do
not reuse products on Project.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged
to perform.
Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as
authorized by Change Orders.
Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.
Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the
Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.
1.
2.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required
by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor
by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services. Contractor shall not employ same
entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 4000 - 6
3.
4.
5.
6.
Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Services:
Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal
Procedures."
D.
Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical
representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's
services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and
conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed
portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
E.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
F.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Owner, Commissioning Authority
and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests
and inspections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
G.
Notify Owner, Architect, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of
irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol service through Contractor.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Access to the Work.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 4000 - 7
H.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
I.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar
quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's
quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction
schedule. Update as the Work progresses.
1.
1.11
A.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Commissioning Authority, testing
agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests
and inspections are required.
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by
authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Notifying Owner, Architect, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of
irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Owner and Commissioning Authority with copy to Contractor and to authorities
having jurisdiction.
Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which
includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A.
Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.2
Date test or inspection was conducted.
Description of the Work tested or inspected.
Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Owner.
Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test
and inspection log for Owner’s, Architect's and Commissioning Authority's reference during
normal working hours.
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 4000 - 8
1.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched
areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible
as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching
in Section 01 7300 "Execution."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 4000 - 9
SECTION 01 4200
REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes definitions of terminology, abbreviations and acronyms, other than basic
Contract definitions, that may occur elsewhere in the Project Manual documents.
1.
1.3
Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
DEFINITIONS
A.
"Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
B.
"Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
C.
"Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
D.
"Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
E.
"Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
F.
"Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
G.
"Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
H.
"Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which
Project is to be built.
1.4
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A.
Applicability of Standards:
Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
REFERENCES
0 14200 - 1
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B.
1.5
Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents
unless otherwise indicated.
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be
accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
AA
Aluminum Association (The)
www.aluminum.org
(703) 358-2960
AABC
Associated Air Balance Council
www.aabchq.com
(202) 737-0202
AAMA
American Architectural Manufacturers Association
www.aamanet.org
(847) 303-5664
AATCC
American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists
www.aatcc.org
(919) 549-8141
ABAA
Air Barrier Association of America
www.airbarrier.org
(866) 956-5888
ABMA
American Bearing Manufacturers Association
www.abma-dc.org
(202) 367-1155
ACI
American Concrete Institute
www.concrete.org
(248) 848-3700
ACPA
American Concrete Pipe Association
www.concrete-pipe.org
(972) 506-7216
AEIC
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The)
www.aeic.org
(205) 257-2530
AF&PA
American Forest & Paper Association
www.afandpa.org
(800) 878-8878
(202) 463-2700
AGA
American Gas Association
www.aga.org
(202) 824-7000
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
REFERENCES
0 14200 - 2
AHAM
Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers
www.aham.org
(202) 872-5955
AHRI
Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute, The
www.ahrinet.org
(703) 524-8800
AI
Asphalt Institute
www.asphaltinstitute.org
(859) 288-4960
AIA
American Institute of Architects (The)
www.aia.org
(800) 242-3837
(202) 626-7300
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
www.aisc.org
(800) 644-2400
(312) 670-2400
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
www.steel.org
(202) 452-7100
AITC
American Institute of Timber Construction
www.aitc-glulam.org
(303) 792-9559
ALSC
American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated
www.alsc.org
(301) 972-1700
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
www.amca.org
(847) 394-0150
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
www.ansi.org
(202) 293-8020
APA
APA - The Engineered Wood Association
www.apawood.org
(253) 565-6600
APA
Architectural Precast Association
www.archprecast.org
(239) 454-6989
API
American Petroleum Institute
www.api.org
(202) 682-8000
ARI
Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
www.ari.org
(703) 524-8800
ARMA
Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association
www.asphaltroofing.org
(202) 207-0917
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
REFERENCES
0 14200 - 3
ASCE
American Society of Civil Engineers
www.asce.org
ASCE/SEI
American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering
Institute
(See ASCE)
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and AirConditioning Engineers
www.ashrae.org
(800) 527-4723
ASME
ASME International
(American Society of Mechanical Engineers International)
www.asme.org
(800) 843-2763
(973) 882-1170
ASSE
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
www.asse-plumbing.org
(440) 835-3040
ASTM
ASTM International
(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
www.astm.org
(610) 832-9500
ATIS
Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions
www.atis.org
(202) 628-6380
AWCMA
American Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(Now WCMA)
AWCI
Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry
www.awci.org
(703) 534-8300
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
www.awinet.org
(571) 323-3636
AWPA
American Wood Protection Association
(Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association)
www.awpa.com
(205) 733-4077
AWS
American Welding Society
www.aws.org
(800) 443-9353
(305) 443-9353
AWWA
American Water Works Association
www.awwa.org
(800) 926-7337
(303) 794-7711
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
(800) 548-2723
(703) 295-6300
(404) 636-8400
APRIL 28, 2014
REFERENCES
0 14200 - 4
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
www.buildershardware.com
(212) 297-2122
BIA
Brick Industry Association (The)
www.bia.org
(703) 620-0010
BICSI
BICSI, Inc.
www.bicsi.org
(800) 242-7405
(813) 979-1991
BIFMA
Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's
Association International
www.bifma.com
(616) 285-3963
BISSC
Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee
www.bissc.org
(866) 342-4772
CCC
Carpet Cushion Council
www.carpetcushion.org
(610) 527-3880
CDA
Copper Development Association
www.copper.org
(800) 232-3282
(212) 251-7200
CEA
Consumer Electronics Association
www.ce.org
(866) 858-1555
(703) 907-7600
CFFA
Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.
www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com
(216) 241-7333
CGA
Compressed Gas Association
www.cganet.com
(703) 788-2700
CIMA
Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association
www.cellulose.org
(888) 881-2462
(937) 222-2462
CISCA
Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
www.cisca.org
(630) 584-1919
CISPI
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
www.cispi.org
(423) 892-0137
CLFMI
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
www.chainlinkinfo.org
(301) 596-2583
CPA
Composite Panel Association
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
REFERENCES
0 14200 - 5
www.pbmdf.com
(703) 724-1128
CRI
Carpet and Rug Institute (The)
www.carpet-rug.com
(800) 882-8846
(706) 278-3176
CRRC
Cool Roof Rating Council
www.coolroofs.org
(866) 465-2523
(510) 485-7175
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
www.crsi.org
(847) 517-1200
(800) 328-6306
CRRC
Cool Roof Rating Council
www.coolroofs.org
(866) 465-2523
(510) 485-7175
CSA
CSA International
(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services)
www.csa-international.org
(866) 797-4272
(416) 747-4000
CSI
Construction Specifications Institute (The)
www.csinet.org
(800) 689-2900
(703) 684-0300
CTI
Cooling Technology Institute
(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)
www.cti.org
(281) 583-4087
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute
www.dhi.org
(703) 222-2010
ECA
Electrical Components Association
www.ec-central.org
(703)907-8024
EIA
Electronic Industries Alliance
www.eia.org
(703) 907-7500
EIMA
EIFS Industry Members Association
www.eima.com
(800) 294-3462
(770) 968-7945
EJMA
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.
www.ejma.org
(914) 332-0040
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge Association
www.esda.org
(315) 339-6937
ETL SEMCO
Intertek ETL SEMCO
(800) 967-5352
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
REFERENCES
0 14200 - 6
(Formerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA)
www.intertek-etlsemko.com
FM Approvals
FM Approvals LLC
www.fmglobal.com
(781) 762-4300
FM Global
FM Global
(Formerly: FMG - FM Global)
www.fmglobal.com
(401) 275-3000
FSA
Fluid Sealing Association
www.fluidsealing.com
(610) 971-4850
GA
Gypsum Association
www.gypsum.org
(301) 277-8686
GANA
Glass Association of North America
www.glasswebsite.com
GRI
(Part of GSI)
GS
Green Seal
www.greenseal.org
(202) 872-6400
GSI
Geosynthetic Institute
www.geosynthetic-institute.org
(610) 522-8440
HI
Hydronics Institute
www.gamanet.org
(908) 464-8200
HI/GAMA
Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association
Division of Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration
Institute (AHRI)
www.ahrinet.org
(908) 464-8200
HMMA
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
(Part of NAAMM)
HPVA
Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
www.hpva.org
(703) 435-2900
HPW
H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.
www.hpwhite.com
(410) 838-6550
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
(785) 271-0208
APRIL 28, 2014
REFERENCES
0 14200 - 7
IAPSC
International Association of Professional Security Consultants
www.iapsc.org
(515) 282-8192
ICBO
International Conference of Building Officials
www.iccsafe.org
(888) 422-7233
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
www.icea.net
(770) 830-0369
ICRI
International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.
www.icri.org
(847) 827-0830
ICPA
International Cast Polymer Association
www.icpa-hq.org
(703) 525-0320
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
www.iec.ch
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)
www.ieee.org
(212) 419-7900
IES
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
www.iesna.org
(703) 525-0320
IEST
Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology
www.iest.org
(847) 255-1561
IGMA
Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance
www.igmaonline.org
(613) 233-1510
ILI
Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.
www.iliai.com
(812) 275-4426
ISA
Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society, The
www.isa.org
(919) 549-8411
ISO
International Organization for Standardization
www.iso.ch
ISSFA
International Solid Surface Fabricators Association
www.issfa.net
ITS
Intertek Testing Service NA
(Now ETL SEMCO)
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
41 22 919 02 11
41 22 749 01 11
(877) 464-7732
(801) 341-7360
APRIL 28, 2014
REFERENCES
0 14200 - 8
ITU
International Telecommunication Union
www.itu.int/home
KCMA
Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association
www.kcma.org
(703) 264-1690
LGSEA
Light Gauge Steel Engineers Association
www.arcat.com
(202) 263-4488
LMA
Laminating Materials Association
(Now part of CPA)
LPI
Lightning Protection Institute
www.lightning.org
(800) 488-6864
MBMA
Metal Building Manufacturers Association
www.mbma.com
(216) 241-7333
MCA
Metal Construction Association
www.metalconstruction.org
(847) 375-4718
MFMA
Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.
www.maplefloor.org
(888) 480-9138
MFMA
Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.
www.metalframingmfg.org
(312) 644-6610
MH
Material Handling
(Now MHIA)
MHIA
Material Handling Industry of America
www.mhia.org
(800) 345-1815
(704) 676-1190
MIA
Marble Institute of America
www.marble-institute.com
(440) 250-9222
MPI
Master Painters Institute
www.paintinfo.com
(888) 674-8937
(604) 298-7578
MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and
Fittings Industry Inc.
www.mss-hq.com
(703) 281-6613
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
41 22 730 51 11
APRIL 28, 2014
REFERENCES
0 14200 - 9
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
www.naamm.org
(630) 942-6591
NACE
National Association of Corrosion Engineers International
www.nace.org
(800) 797-6223
NADCA
National Air Duct Cleaners Association
www.nadca.com
(202) 737-2926
NAIMA
North American Insulation Manufacturers Association
www.naima.org
(703) 684-0084
NBGQA
National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.
www.nbgqa.com
(800) 557-2848
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association
www.ncma.org
(703) 713-1900
NCTA
National Cable & Telecommunications Association
www.ncta.com
(202) 222-2300
NEBB
National Environmental Balancing Bureau
www.nebb.org
(301) 977-3698
NECA
National Electrical Contractors Association
www.necanet.org
(301) 657-3110
NeLMA
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association
www.nelma.org
(207) 829-6901
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
www.nema.org
(703) 841-3200
NETA
InterNational Electrical Testing Association
www.netaworld.org
(888) 300-6382
(269) 488-6382
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
www.nfpa.org
(800) 344-3555
(617) 770-3000
NFRC
National Fenestration Rating Council
www.nfrc.org
(301) 589-1776
NGA
National Glass Association
www.glass.org
(866) 342-5642
(703) 442-4890
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
REFERENCES
0 14200 - 10
NHLA
National Hardwood Lumber Association
www.natlhardwood.org
(800) 933-0318
(901) 377-1818
NLGA
National Lumber Grades Authority
www.nlga.org
(604) 524-2393
NOFMA
NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association)
www.nofma.org
(901) 526-5016
NOMMA
National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association
www.nomma.org
(888) 516-8585
NRCA
National Roofing Contractors Association
www.nrca.net
(800) 323-9545
(847) 299-9070
NRMCA
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
www.nrmca.org
(888) 846-7622
(301) 587-1400
NSF
National Sanitation Foundation International
www.nsf.org
(800) 673-6275
(734) 769-8010
NSSGA
National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association
www.nssga.org
(800) 342-1415
(703) 525-8788
NWFA
National Wood Flooring Association
www.nwfa.org
(800) 422-4556
(636) 519-9663
PCI
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
www.pci.org
(312) 786-0300
PDI
Plumbing & Drainage Institute
www.pdionline.org
(800) 589-8956
(978) 557-0720
PGI
PVC Geomembrane Institute
http://pgi-tp.cee.uiuc.edu
(217) 333-3929
PTI
Post-Tensioning Institute
www.post-tensioning.org
(248) 848-3180
RCSC
Research Council on Structural Connections
www.boltcouncil.org
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
REFERENCES
0 14200 - 11
RFCI
Resilient Floor Covering Institute
www.rfci.com
(706) 882-3833
Redwood Inspection Service
www.redwoodinspection.com
(925) 935-1499
SAE
SAE International
www.sae.org
(877) 606-7323
(724) 776-4841
SCAQMD
South Coast Air Quality Management District
www.aqmd.com
(909) 396-2000
SCTE
Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers
www.scte.org
(800) 542-5040
(610) 363-6888
SDI
Steel Deck Institute
www.sdi.org
(847) 458-4647
SDI
Steel Door Institute
www.steeldoor.org
(440) 899-0010
SEI/ASCE
Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil
Engineers
(See ASCE)
SIA
Security Industry Association
www.siaonline.org
(866) 817-8888
(703) 683-2075
SJI
Steel Joist Institute
www.steeljoist.org
(843) 626-1995
SMA
Screen Manufacturers Association
www.smacentral.org
(561) 533-0991
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National
Association
www.smacna.org
(703) 803-2980
SPFA
Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance
(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry,
Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)
www.sprayfoam.org
(800) 523-6154
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The)
www.spib.org
(850) 434-2611
RIS
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
REFERENCES
0 14200 - 12
SPRI
Single Ply Roofing Industry
www.spri.org
(781) 647-7026
SSINA
Specialty Steel Industry of North America
www.ssina.com
(800) 982-0355
(202) 342-8630
SSPC
SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings
www.sspc.org
(877) 281-7772
(412) 281-2331
STI
Steel Tank Institute
www.steeltank.com
(847) 438-8265
SWI
Steel Window Institute
www.steelwindows.com
(216) 241-7333
SWPA
Submersible Wastewater Pump Association
www.swpa.org
(847) 681-1868
TCA
Tilt-Up Concrete Association
www.tilt-up.org
(319) 895-6911
TCNA
Tile Council of North America, Inc.
www.tileusa.com
(864) 646-8453
TEMA
Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association
www.tema.org
(914) 332-0040
TIA/EIA
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic
Industries Alliance
www.tiaonline.org
(703) 907-7700
TMS
The Masonry Society
www.masonrysociety.org
(303) 939-9700
TPI
Truss Plate Institute, Inc.
www.tpinst.org
(703) 683-1010
TPI
Turfgrass Producers International
www.turfgrasssod.org
(800) 405-8873
(847) 649-5555
UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
www.ul.com
(877) 854-3577
(847) 272-8800
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
REFERENCES
0 14200 - 13
B.
UNI
Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association
www.uni-bell.org
(972) 243-3902
USGBC
U.S. Green Building Council
www.usgbc.org
(800) 795-1747
WASTEC
Waste Equipment Technology Association
www.wastec.org
(800) 424-2869
(202) 244-4700
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
www.wclib.org
(800) 283-1486
(503) 639-0651
WCMA
Window Covering Manufacturers Association
www.wcmanet.org
(212) 297-2122
WDMA
Window & Door Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door
Association)
www.wdma.com
(800) 223-2301
(312) 321-6802
WI
Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of
California)
www.wicnet.org
(916) 372-9943
WMMPA
Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
www.wmmpa.com
(800) 550-7889
(530) 661-9591
WSRCA
Western States Roofing Contractors Association
www.wsrca.com
(800) 725-0333
(650) 570-5441
WWPA
Western Wood Products Association
www.wwpa.org
(503) 224-3930
Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be
accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
IAPMO
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical
Officials
www.iapmo.org
(909) 472-4100
ICC
International Code Council
www.iccsafe.org
(888) 422-7233
ICC-ES
ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.
(800) 423-6587
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
REFERENCES
0 14200 - 14
www.icc-es.org
C.
D.
(562) 699-0543
Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are
believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
COE
Army Corps of Engineers
www.usace.army.mil
(202) 761-0011
CPSC
Consumer Product Safety Commission
www.cpsc.gov
(800) 638-2772
(301) 504-7923
DOE
Department of Energy
www.energy.gov
(202) 586-9220
EPA
Environmental Protection Agency
www.epa.gov
(202) 272-0167
FCC
Federal Communications Commission
www.fcc.gov
(888) 225-5322
FDA
Food and Drug Administration
www.fda.gov
(888) 463-6332
GSA
General Services Administration
www.gsa.gov
(800) 488-3111
NIST
National Institute of Standards and Technology
www.nist.gov
(301) 975-6478
OSHA
Occupational Safety & Health Administration
www.osha.gov
(800) 321-6742
(202) 693-1999
USPS
United States Postal Service
www.usps.com
(202) 268-2000
Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and
regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to
change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract
Documents.
ADAAG
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility
Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
Available from U.S. Access Board
www.access-board.gov
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
(800) 872-2253
(202) 272-0080
APRIL 28, 2014
REFERENCES
0 14200 - 15
E.
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations
Available from Government Printing Office
www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html
(866) 512-1800
(202) 512-1800
UFAS
Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
Available from U.S. Access Board
www.access-board.gov
(800) 872-2253
(202) 272-0080
State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be
accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CBHF
State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau
of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation
www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti
(800) 952-5210
(916) 574-2041
CCR
California Code of Regulations
www.calregs.com
(916) 323-6815
CDHS
California Department of Health Services
www.dhcs.ca.gov
(916) 445-4171
CDPH
California Department of Public Health, Indoor Air Quality
Section
www.cal-iaq.org
CPUC
California Public Utilities Commission
www.cpuc.ca.gov
(415) 703-2782
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
REFERENCES
0 14200 - 16
SECTION 01 5000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Section 01 1000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.
USE CHARGES
A.
General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included
in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services
and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect,
occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction
operations.
C.
Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction
operations.
D.
Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all
entities for construction operations.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
B.
Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA
Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
C.
Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having
jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention
program.
D.
Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and
construction from water absorption and damage.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 5000 - 1
1.
2.
3.
E.
Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the
dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time
frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to
be inadequate. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.5
Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water
absorption or water damage.
Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating
water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.
Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials,
plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these
operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to
permit installation of finish materials.
Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work.
HVAC system isolation schematic drawing.
Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge.
Waste handling procedures.
Other dust-control measures.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
C.
Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and
ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Chain-Link Fencing: Maximum 2-1/2 inch, minimum 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, chainlink fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inchOD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts , with continuous wind screen, with hog
ring installation and wind flaps.
B.
Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches.
C.
Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool;
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 5000 - 2
2.2
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B.
Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and
construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other
Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan
racks, and bookcases.
Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide
electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one
receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square
tack and marker boards.
Drinking water and private toilet.
Coffee machine and supplies.
Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68
to 72 deg F.
Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.
C.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds:
Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to
accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. Store combustible
materials apart from building.
D.
Include night lighting of building interior and exterior with light intensity sufficient to identify
occupants from outside of property fencing.
E.
Provide fire extinguishers at building interiors and other appropriate locations as required by
Owner’s insurance provider, OSHA Safety, and governing authorities.
2.3
EQUIPMENT
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B.
HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating
units is prohibited.
Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location
and application.
Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter at each return-air grille in system and
remove at end of construction. Clean HVAC system as required in Section 01 7700
"Closeout Procedures"
Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage
filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 5000 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
B.
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. Arrange with utility company,
Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make
connections for temporary services.
B.
Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
D.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,
number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
E.
Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
F.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
1.
G.
Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to
level required to allow installation or application of finishes.
Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,
capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1.
2.
H.
Connect
Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated.
Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1.
2.
Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
Install lighting for Project identification sign.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 5000 - 4
I.
Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install one telephone line for each field office.
1.
Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a.
b.
2.
At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.
J.
Police and fire departments.
Ambulance service.
Contractor's home office.
Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number.
Architect's office.
Engineers' offices.
Owner's office.
Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when
away from field office.
Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office
adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintain
electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Processor: Intel Pentium D or Intel CoreDuo, 3.0 GHz processing speed.
Memory: 4 gigabyte.
Disk Storage: 300 gigabyte hard-disk drive and combination DVD-RW/CD-RW drive.
Display: 22-inch LCD monitor with 256-Mb dedicated video RAM.
Full-size keyboard and mouse.
Network Connectivity: 10/100BaseT Ethernet.
Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Microsoft Windows Vista
Business.
Productivity Software:
a.
b.
c.
9.
10.
11.
12.
3.3
Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office.
Provide one telephone line for Owner's use.
Microsoft Office Professional, XP or higher, including Word, Excel, and Outlook.
Adobe Reader 7.0 or higher.
WinZip 7.0 or higher.
Printer:
"All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing,
photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions.
Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall,
providing minimum 384 Kbps upload and 1 Mbps download speeds at each computer.
Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware,
phishing, and spam protection in a combined application.
Backup: External hard drive, minimum 40 gigabyte, with automated backup software
providing daily backups.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with the following:
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 5000 - 5
1.
2.
B.
Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas
adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within
construction limits indicated on Drawings.
1.
C.
Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment
as required to minimize dust.
Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved
areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain
temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary
roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction
operations.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction
area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136.
Comply with NFPA 241.
Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection.
Remove before Substantial Completion.
Personnel remaining after Substantial
Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to
Owner.
Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and
paved areas.
Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas
according to Division 32 specifications for earth moving.
Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material,
regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing.
Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
E.
Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.
F.
Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1.
2.
G.
Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1.
2.
3.
H.
Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining
properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.
Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and
individuals seeking entrance to Project. Provide temporary, directional signs for
construction personnel and visitors.
Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1.
Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 5000 - 6
I.
Temporary Elevator Use: Use of elevators is not permitted.
J.
Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders
are not adequate.
K.
Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted,
provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial
Completion.
3.4
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and
other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be
removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
B.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible
air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
1.
C.
Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 01 1000 "Summary."
Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent
properties and walkways, according to requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit
or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction
activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones.
Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during
construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and
sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project.
Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed
during removal.
D.
Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of
stormwater from heavy rains.
E.
Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
F.
Site Enclosure Fence: Prior to commencing earthwork, furnish and install site enclosure fence
in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance
gates.
1.
G.
Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined
sufficient to accommodate construction operations.
Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas
of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft,
and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 5000 - 7
H.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
I.
Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated
and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
J.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and
similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1.
K.
Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration
and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
L.
Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side,
and fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side.
Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by
authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies.
Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas.
Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security
locks where openings are required.
Protect air-handling equipment.
Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.
Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate
temporary enclosures.
Prohibit smoking in construction areas.
Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel
at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A.
Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible
signs of mold that may appear during construction.
B.
Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are
subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Protect porous materials from water damage.
Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.
Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.
Remove standing water from decks.
Keep deck openings covered or dammed.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 5000 - 8
C.
Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full
enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of
moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high
organic content, into partially enclosed building.
Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.
Discard or replace water-damaged material.
Do not install material that is wet.
Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before
enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.
Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building
enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.
Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and
exposure to water limits.
a.
b.
c.
3.6
Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsumbased products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet
for 48 hours are considered defective.
Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during
construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of
exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture
levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.
Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured
moisture level within 48 hours.
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Maintain operation
of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a
24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.
2.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended, or acceptable, for integration
into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development,
remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 5000 - 9
3.
Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical
compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns.
Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period.
Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in
Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 5000 - 10
SECTION 01 6000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; and comparable products.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Section 01 2500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
Section 01 4200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.4
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or
exceed those of specified product.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's
product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or
model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function,
dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics
for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the
specification.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product
after prior written approval by Owner as a product acceptable for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
0 16000 - 1
1.
2.
Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable
Products" Article.
Architect's Action:
If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request.
Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product
request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional
information or documentation, whichever is later.
a.
b.
B.
1.5
Form of Approval: As specified in Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures."
Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a
comparable product request within time allocated.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 01 3300
"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Delivery and Handling:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Storage:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.7
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
0 16000 - 2
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1.
2.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
1.
2.
C.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
specific rights for Owner.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for
submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect, subject to Owner’s
approval, will make selection.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.
Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or
"or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable
Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
Product Selection Procedures:
1.
2.
Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions
for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
Products:
a.
3.
Restricted List:
Where Specifications include a list of names of both
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will be considered.
Manufacturers:
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
0 16000 - 3
a.
4.
2.2
Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will be considered.
Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product
indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other
characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the
other named manufacturers.
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
Conditions for Consideration: Architect, subject to Owner’s approval, will consider Contractor's
request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following
conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record
noncompliance with these requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
0 16000 - 4
SECTION 01 7300
EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the
Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Construction layout.
Field engineering and surveying.
Installation of the Work.
Cutting and patching.
Progress cleaning.
Starting and adjusting.
Protection of installed construction.
Correction of the Work.
Section 01 1000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.
Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels, and final cleaning.
Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated
construction.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
other work.
B.
Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after
installation of other work.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
B.
Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
EXECUTION
01 7300 - 1
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Owner and
Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Owner before
proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching.
Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their loadcarrying capacity or increase deflection
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or
components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in
reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance
or decreased operational life or safety.
Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a
manner that would, in Owner's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove
and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory
manner.
B.
Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved
in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential
interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before
proceeding.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written
recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will provide a match acceptable to Owner for the visual and functional performance of
in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting
the Work.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
EXECUTION
01 7300 - 2
1.
2.
B.
Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.
1.
2.
3.
C.
3.2
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work
is required by other Sections, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services,
and other utilities.
Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities
serving Project site.
Description of the Work.
List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
Recommended corrections.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
B.
Space Requirements:
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
C.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of
Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in
Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination."
D.
Surface and Substrate Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for
preparation of substrates to receive subsequent work.
3.3
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Owner and Architect promptly.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
EXECUTION
01 7300 - 3
B.
General: Engage a professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying
practices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
Establish limits on use of Project site.
Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
Notify Owner when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E.
Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name
and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Owner and Architect.
3.4
FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
1.
2.
B.
Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval of Owner. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points
promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Owner
before proceeding.
Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide
temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed.
Restore marked
construction to its original condition.
Final Property Survey: Engage a professional engineer to prepare a final property survey
showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification,
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
EXECUTION
01 7300 - 4
signed by professional engineer, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are
accurately positioned as shown on the survey.
1.
2.
3.5
Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing
improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours,
and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.
Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with
authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in
unoccupied spaces.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction
items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
G.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
H.
Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate
size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned
with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify
size and type required for load conditions.
1.
2.
3.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Owner and Architect.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
Coordinate installation of anchorages.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
EXECUTION
01 7300 - 5
I.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.6
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. Cut
in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other
construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials
so as not to void existing warranties.
C.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
D.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
E.
Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free
passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to
requirements in Section 01 1000 "Summary."
F.
Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems
are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before
cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.
G.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
H.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where
required by cutting and patching operations.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections, where applicable.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
EXECUTION
01 7300 - 6
1.
2.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of
patching and refinishing.
a.
b.
3.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a.
4.
5.
I.
3.7
Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer
and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply
final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide
additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an evenplane surface of uniform appearance.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas.
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
2.
3.
Enforce
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. Use
containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1.
2.
D.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
EXECUTION
01 7300 - 7
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed
surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to
ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials
down sewers or into waterways.
H.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J.
Limiting Exposures:
Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.8
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation.
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
1.
2.
B.
3.9
Remove
Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper
operation without binding.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and
safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Manufacturer's Field Service:
"Quality Requirements."
Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01 4000
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
EXECUTION
01 7300 - 8
SECTION 01 7700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Subsequent and in addition to the Owner/Contractor agreement requirements, this Section
includes administrative and procedural requirements for Contract closeout, including, but not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Substantial Completion procedures.
Final completion procedures.
List of incomplete items ("Punch List").
Warranties.
Final cleaning.
Repair of the Work.
Section 01 7300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.
Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
Section 01 7839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
Section 01 7900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's
personnel.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For cleaning agents.
B.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
C.
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in
other Sections.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 7700 - 1
1.6
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and
corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why
the Work is incomplete.
B.
Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior
to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that
are incomplete at time of request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction
permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.
Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project
record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction
photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and
similar final record information.
Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,
workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar
documents.
Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools,
spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by
Architect and Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where
applicable.
a.
5.
C.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior
to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that
are incomplete at time of request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of
maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item
and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect and
Owner's signature for receipt of submittals.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified
in Section 01 7900 "Demonstration and Training."
Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency
responders.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a
minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and
tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 7700 - 2
inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items
identified by Architect and Owner, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be
issued.
1.
2.
1.7
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final
completion, complete the following:
1.
2.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of
10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On
receipt of request, Architect and Owner will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Architect and Owner will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after
inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before
certificate will be issued.
1.
1.8
Submit a final Application for Payment.
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed
and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A.
Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
2.
3.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and
proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
Include the following information at the top of each page:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
Project name.
Date.
Name of Architect and Owner.
Name of Contractor.
Page number.
Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:
a.
b.
Use facsimile of sample form included in Project Manual. If no form is provided,
use CSI Form 14.1A.
Submit three paper copies. Architect will return two copies.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 7700 - 3
1.9
SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT MANUAL & WARRANTIES
A.
Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect and Owner for designated
portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial
Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights
under warranty.
B.
Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of
designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C.
Organize manual and warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of
contents of Project Manual.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Bind warranties, product data, operating and maintenance manuals, systems diagrams,
programming information, as-built drawings, and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinylcovered, loose-leaf binders, pocket inserts for drawings, thickness as necessary to
accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "MANUAL &
WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
Manual & Warranty Electronic File: Scan all Manual & Warranties information and
assemble complete package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling
navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of
document.
Provide two (2) copies of Manual & Warranty binders for operation and maintenance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
1.
Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not
applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum
allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 7700 - 4
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and
other foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean
according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and
similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.
1)
n.
o.
3.2
Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01.
Provide written report on completion of cleaning.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
REPAIR OF THE WORK
A.
Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of
Substantial Completion.
B.
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective
parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,
provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.
Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified
condition.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 7700 - 5
1.
2.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other
damaged transparent materials.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a.
3.
4.
Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels
and identification.
Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and
noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for
new fixtures.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 7700 - 6
SECTION 01 7823
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Subsequent and in addition to the Owner/Contractor agreement requirements, this Section
includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance
manuals, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
Emergency manuals.
Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Product maintenance manuals.
Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation
and maintenance manuals.
DEFINITIONS
A.
System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular
interaction.
B.
Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual
Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed
manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.
1.
2.
B.
Architect, Owner and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether content of
operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.
Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions
and field conditions.
Format: Submit paper copies of the operations and maintenance manuals as follows:
1.
2.
Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and
directories in clear plastic sleeves.
Number of Copies: Three (3); Architect will forward two copies to Owner.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 7823 - 1
C.
Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for
Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training.
Architect, Owner and Commissioning Authority will return copy with comments.
1.
Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect, Owner's and Commissioning
Authority's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt
of Architect, Owner's and Commissioning Authority's comments and prior to commencing
demonstration and training.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A.
Directory:
Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and
maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to
desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
List of documents.
List of systems.
List of equipment.
Table of contents.
B.
List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation
and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C.
List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For
pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D.
Tables of Contents:
maintenance manual.
E.
Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,
identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the
Contract Documents.
If no designation exists, assign a designation according to
ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building
Systems."
2.2
Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and
REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for
each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a
system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Title page.
Table of contents.
Manual contents.
Title Page: Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Subject matter included in manual.
Name and address of Project.
Name and address of Owner.
Date of submittal.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 7823 - 2
5.
6.
C.
Name and contact information for Contractor.
Name and contact information for Architect.
Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to
the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
1.
If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each
volume of the set.
D.
Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
E.
Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.
1.
Binders:
Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness
necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear
plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to
hold folded oversize sheets.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual.
Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components
of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.
Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a.
6.
2.3
If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize
data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Crossreference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper
operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, subject matter of contents, and
indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number
for multiple-volume sets.
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes
and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert
typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing
locations.
Operation & Maintenance Manual Electronic File: Scan all information and assemble
complete package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation
to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.
EMERGENCY MANUALS
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1.
Type of emergency.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 7823 - 3
2.
3.
B.
Emergency instructions.
Emergency procedures.
Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Fire.
Gas leak.
Water leak.
Power failure.
System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
Chemical release or spill.
C.
Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D.
Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Instructions on stopping.
Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
OPERATION MANUALS
A.
Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Descriptions: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and
equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.
Operating standards.
Operating procedures.
Operating logs.
Wiring diagrams.
Control diagrams.
Piped system diagrams.
Precautions against improper use.
License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract
Documents.
Manufacturer's name.
Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
Equipment function.
Operating characteristics.
Limiting conditions.
Performance curves.
Engineering data and tests.
Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 7823 - 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Startup procedures.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
Regulation and control procedures.
Instructions on stopping.
Normal shutdown instructions.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
D.
Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls
as installed.
E.
Piped Systems:
identification.
F.
Scan all information and assemble complete package into a single indexed electronic PDF file
with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning
of document.
2.5
Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or
identifier where applicable.
C.
Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Product name and model number.
Manufacturer's name.
Color, pattern, and texture.
Material and chemical composition.
Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inspection procedures.
Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
Repair instructions.
E.
Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 7823 - 5
1.
G.
2.6
Include procedures and required notifications for warranty claims.
Scan all information and assemble complete package into a single indexed electronic PDF file
with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning
of document.
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance
service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each
product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance
service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and
drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.
C.
Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1.
2.
D.
Maintenance Procedures:
maintenance procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.
Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
Include the following information and items that detail essential
Test and inspection instructions.
Troubleshooting guide.
Precautions against improper maintenance.
Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1.
2.
Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
Maintenance and Service Record:
Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
F.
Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G.
Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 7823 - 6
1.
I.
Include procedures and required notifications for warranty claims.
Scan all information and assemble complete package into a single indexed electronic PDF file
with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning
of document.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUAL PREPARATION
A.
Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that
provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
B.
Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
C.
Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
1.
2.
E.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
1.
F.
Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment
or systems.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence
and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1.
2.
G.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information
for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an
instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 01 7839
"Project Record Documents."
Comply with Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 7823 - 7
H.
Scan all information and assemble complete package into a single indexed electronic PDF file
with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning
of document.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 7823 - 8
SECTION 01 7839
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Subsequent and in addition to the Owner/Contractor agreement requirements this section
includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Record Drawings.
Record Specifications.
Record Product Data.
Miscellaneous record submittals.
Section 01 7300 "Execution" for final property survey.
Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Record Drawings: Submit one set of marked-up record prints.
B.
Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda
and contract modifications.
C.
Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal.
1.
Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,
submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.
D.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous recordkeeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit
one paper copy of each submittal.
E.
Reports: Submit written report indicating items incorporated into project record documents
concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes,
product selections, and other notations incorporated.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01 7839 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.
1.
Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide
information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic
documentation.
Dimensional changes to Drawings.
Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
Depths of foundations below first floor.
Locations and depths of underground utilities.
Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
Revisions to electrical circuitry.
Actual equipment locations.
Duct size and routing.
Locations of concealed internal utilities.
Changes made by Change Order.
Changes made following Architect and Owner's written orders.
Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use
personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record
prints.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial
Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect and Owner. When authorized,
prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:
1.
2.
Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the
original Contract Drawings.
Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.
Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01 7839 - 2
3.
4.
Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect and Owner for resolution.
Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for
use in recording information.
a.
b.
C.
Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1.
2.
3.
Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
on cover sheets.
Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files
that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet
identification. Include identification in each digital data file.
Identification: As follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.2
See Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of
Architect's digital data files.
Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate
layers.
Project name.
Date.
Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
2.
B.
2.3
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where
applicable.
Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy.
RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A.
Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where
applicable.
Format: Submit record Product Data as paper copy. Include record Product Data directory
organized by Specification Section number and title.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01 7839 - 3
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A.
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
B.
Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as paper copy. Include miscellaneous record
submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A.
Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project
record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they
occur; do not wait until end of Project.
B.
Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record
documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,
dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record
documents for Architect and Owner's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01 7839 - 4
SECTION 01 7900
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Subsequent and in addition to the Owner/Contractor agreement requirements, this Section
includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel,
including the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Demonstration and training video recordings.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training,
including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of
instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and
outline for each training module.
1.
Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and
training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording
of live instructional module.
B.
Qualification Data: For facilitator.
C.
Attendance Record:
instruction time.
1.4
For each training module, submit list of participants and length of
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of
each training module.
1.
Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Name of Project.
Name and address of videographer.
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
Date of video recording.
Transcript: Prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance
manuals. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
01 7900 - 1
3.
1.5
cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording. Include
name of Project and date of video recording on each page.
At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared
and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance
personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project,
and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning
performance.
B.
Instructor Qualifications:
A factory-authorized service representative, complying with
requirements in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and
maintenance procedures and training.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to
minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.
B.
Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time,
and course content.
C.
Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data
has been reviewed and approved by Architect and Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A.
Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for
each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections.
B.
Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include
a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each
module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or
component:
1.
Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
Operating standards.
Regulatory requirements.
Equipment function.
Operating characteristics.
Limiting conditions.
Performance curves.
Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
01 7900 - 2
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
Alignments.
Checking adjustments.
Noise and vibration adjustments.
Economy and efficiency adjustments.
Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a.
b.
7.
Startup procedures.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
Regulation and control procedures.
Control sequences.
Safety procedures.
Instructions on stopping.
Normal shutdown instructions.
Operating procedures for emergencies.
Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
Adjustments: Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.
Instructions on stopping.
Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
5.
Emergency manuals.
Operations manuals.
Maintenance manuals.
Project record documents.
Identification systems.
Warranties and bonds.
Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
Diagnostic instructions.
Test and inspection procedures.
Maintenance: Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Inspection procedures.
Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
Procedures for routine cleaning
Procedures for preventive maintenance.
Procedures for routine maintenance.
Instruction on use of special tools.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
01 7900 - 3
8.
Repairs: Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Diagnosis instructions.
Repair instructions.
Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
Instructions for identifying parts and components.
Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training
module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with
requirements in Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."
B.
Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
3.2
INSTRUCTION
A.
Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to
coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of
participants, instruction times, and location.
B.
Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1.
2.
Unless otherwise stated in Owner/Architect Agreement, Architect will furnish an instructor
to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory
requirements.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
C.
Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. Schedule training with Owner,
through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice. For equipment that requires
seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
D.
Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully
operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation
and maintenance data submittals.
E.
Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove
instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial
training use.
3.3
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS
A.
General: Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and
demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice. At beginning
of each training module, record each chart of learning objective and lesson outline.
B.
Video: Provide minimum 640 x 480 video resolution converted to format file type acceptable to
Owner, on electronic media.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
01 7900 - 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
Electronic Media: Read-only format compact disc acceptable to Owner, with commercialgrade graphic label.
File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to project manual
table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu.
File Names: Utilize file names based upon name of equipment generally described in
video segment, as identified in Project specifications.
Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for
inclusion on the Equipment Demonstration and Training DVD that describes the following
for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project table of
contents:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to
adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.
1.
Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.
a.
b.
c.
2.
D.
Name of Contractor/Installer.
Business address.
Business phone number.
Point of contact.
E-mail address.
Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment.
Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project
Manual table of contents.
Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes,
stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon
commencement of new filming segment.
Verify that equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording.
Light Levels: Verify that light levels are adequate to properly light equipment; furnish additional
portable lighting as required.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
01 7900 - 5
SECTION 02 4119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Section 01 7300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall
where indicated.
C.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and
that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled.
1.4
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
1.5
Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
by selective demolition operations.
Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 4119 - 1
1.6
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures
proposed for protecting individuals and property, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate
proposed locations and construction of barriers.
B.
Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending
dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.
Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
Use of elevator and stairs.
Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of
Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
C.
Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.
D.
Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after completion
of selective demolition.
1.7
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far
as practical.
C.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
D.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1.
If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate
contract.
E.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
1.
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 4119 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Regulatory Requirements:
Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.
B.
Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not
guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.
C.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E.
Survey of Existing Conditions:
photographs.
3.2
Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A.
Existing Services/Systems to Remain:
protect them against damage.
B.
Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems
serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1.
2.
3.
Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
a.
b.
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap
or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 4119 - 3
c.
d.
3.3
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
PREPARATION
A.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area
and to and from occupied portions of building.
Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of
existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage
and damage to structure and interior areas.
Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are
exposed during selective demolition operations.
Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression
devices during flame-cutting operations.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations
after selective demolition operations are complete.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 4119 - 4
3.5
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A.
Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to
remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw
cuts.
B.
Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
3.6
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project
site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1.
2.
3.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.7
CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 4119 - 5
SECTION 06 1000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
Work Included: Furnish and install Rough Carpentry required for the project as shown on the
Drawings and specified herein. This Section also includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Related work specified elsewhere:
1.
1.2
Structural floor, wall, and roof framing.
Floor, wall and roof plywood sheathing.
Furring for wall finishes.
Rough hardware.
Blocking for roofing systems and related metal flashings.
Preservative treatment.
Concealed wood blocking and backing for support of accessories, wall cabinets, finish
hardware.
Finish Carpentry.
REFERENCES, CODES AND STANDARDS: The following references, codes and standards
are hereby made a part of this Section and rough carpentry work shall conform to the applicable
requirements therein except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings. Nothing
contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is contrary to code requirements.
A.
ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) American Softwood Lumber Standard PS-20.
B.
APA (American Plywood Association) - Guide to Plywood Grades.
C.
ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
D.
ASTM D3498 - Adhesives for Field-Gluing Plywood to Lumber Framing for Floor Systems.
E.
AWPA (American Wood Preserver’s Association) - Book of Standards.
F.
DFPA (Douglas Fir Plywood Association)
G.
FS FF-S-325 - Shield, Expansion; Nail, Expansion; and nail, Drive Screw (Devices, Anchoring,
Masonry).
H.
FS TT-W-571 - Wood Preservation - Treating Practices.
I.
FSC – Forest Stewardship Council, Washington, D.C.
J.
NLMA (National Lumber Manufacturers Association) – National Design Specification for StressGrade Lumber and its Fastenings.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 1
K.
WCLIB (West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau) - Standard Grading Rules No. 17.
L.
WWPA (Western Wood Products Association) - Western Lumber Grading Rules
M.
AFPA (American Forest & Paper Association)
1.
2.
3.
N.
1.3
National Design Specification (NDS) for Wood Construction.
Special Design Provisions for Wind and Seismic
Manual for Engineered Construction
California Building Code, 2010 Edition.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
B.
Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA.
1.4
SUBMITTALS:
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01 3300.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature describing products.
C.
Samples: Only as requested by the Architect.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificates: Submit certificates of compliance with standards noted.
1.5
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A.
Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 6000.
B.
Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage to edges,
ends, and surfaces.
C.
Deliver and store packaged products in original containers or bundles with seals unbroken and
labels intact until time of use.
D.
Keep materials dry. Where necessary, stack materials off ground on level flat forms, fully
protected from weather.
E.
Protect 'kiln-dried' and 'S-Dry' materials from moisture. Separate from contact with soil or earth
or other sources of moisture.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LUMBER MATERIALS
A.
Mudsills:
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 2
1.
2.
B.
Horizontal Framing Lumber:
1.
2.
3.
C.
4x headers and beams: D.F. No. 2
2x rafters and joists: D.F. No. 2.
6x6 and larger: D.F. No. 1.
Vertical Framing Lumber:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
2x4: D.F. Standard or better pressure treated.
2x6: D.F. No. 2 or better pressure treated.
2x4 and 3x4 studs: D.F. Stud
2x6 studs: D.F. No. 2.
4x posts: D.F. No. 2.
6x posts: D.F. No. 1
PLYWOOD MATERIALS
A.
2.3
APA CC Exterior or CD Interior with exterior glue.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Rough Hardware: Exterior hardware nails and fasteners shall be hot-dipped galvanized, plain
finish for interior locations, size and type to suit application. Nails to be common nails or ICBO
approved equivalent, unless authorized otherwise in writing.
B.
Bolts: Hexagonal heads, Grade A conforming to ASTM A307; galvanized for exterior, exposed
applications only.
C.
Sill Bolts: Galvanized conforming to ASTM F1554, Grade 36.
D.
Lag Screws and Lag Bolts: Meet requirements of National Design Specifications for Stress
Grade Lumber and Its Fastenings.
E.
Washers: Washers for bearing against wood shall be provided under all bolt heads, lag screw
heads, and nuts. Malleable iron or steel plate having an area equal to 16 times the area of bolt
or lag screw. Steel washers shall have a thickness not less than 1/10 the length of the washer's
longest side. Malleable iron washers shall have a thickness not less than 1/2 the bolt or lag
screw diameter and having a bearing surface for the nut or head equal in diameter and having a
bearing surface for the nut or head equal in diameter to not less than the long diameter of the
nut or head.
F.
Powder Driven Fasteners: Tempered steel pins with special corrosive-resistant plating or
coating. Pins shall have guide washers to accurately control penetration, maximum 3/4 inch.
Fastening shall be accomplished by low-velocity piston-driven powder-actuated tool. Pins and
tool shall be same as manufactured by Hilti Fastening Systems; Impex Tool corporation; or
equal product substituted under provisions of Section 01630.
G.
Expansion Bolts: FS FF-S-325, Group II, Type 4, size as noted.
TZ, or approved equal.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
Same as Hilti, Inc. Kwik Bolt
APRIL 28, 2014
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 3
H.
Fabricated Sheet Metal Timber Framing Connectors: Fabricate from hot-dipped galvanized
steel. Connectors shall be at least 20 gauge material (1/8 inch plate materials where welded),
unless otherwise noted, punched for nailing. Nails and Nailing shall conform to the
manufacturer's instructions with a nail provided for each punched hole. Types as noted on the
drawings. Same as Simpson Co.; KC metal Products; or equal product substituted under
provisions of Section 01630.
I.
Glue: Conforming to ASTM D3498 and APA Performance Specification AFG-01.
2.4
WOOD TREATMENT
A.
Materials:
1.
2.
B.
Shop Treatment of Wood Materials:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Wood Preservative, Pressure Treatment:
FS-TT-W-571, AWPA treatment C2 and C9
using either Alkaline Quat (ACQ Type B and D), Copper Azole (CBA-A, CA-B), Sodium
Borates (SBX).
Wood Preservative, Surface Application: Copper green, manufactured by Willard
Products.
Provide pressure treatment for lumber other than foundation grade redwood located
within 1-1/2 inches of concrete, in contact with bituminous roofing, waterproofing, and
related metal flashings, and where noted on Drawings.
Lumber: Treat in accordance with AWPB LP-3.
Plywood: Treat in accordance with AWPB LP-3.
Galvanization
1.
Anchor bolts, nails, fasteners, and metal framing connectors in contact with pressure
treated lumber shall be hot-dipped galvanized to a rating of G-185 per ASTM A653.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SITE TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS
A.
3.2
Apply non-pressure wood preservative to lumber and plywood embedded in and placed against
concrete.
FRAMING
A.
Erect wood framing members level and plumb.
B.
Place horizontal members laid flat, crown side up.
C.
Construct framing members full length without splices.
D.
Double members at openings over one sq.ft. Space short studs over and under opening to stud
spacing.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 4
E.
Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings. Frame rigidly into joists.
F.
Make bearings full and finish bearing surfaces to give sure and even support.
G.
Do not notch, bore, or cut members for pipes, vents, conduits or other reasons except as shown
on the Drawings or specifically authorized by the Architect.
H.
Construct double joists under discontinuous walls.
I
Coordinate delivery of glue laminated structural units and plywood web joists.
J.
Layout embedded items for entire project.
K.
Shim, strip and furr as necessary to achieve described tolerances.
3.3
BRIDGING
A.
Install solid blocking between joists at points of support and wherever sheathing or flooring is
discontinuous.
B.
Blocking may be omitted where joists rests on ribbons and are nailed to studs and where joists
are supported on metal hangers.
3.4
SHEATHING
A.
Secure roof sheathing perpendicular to framing members with ends staggered. Secure sheet
edges over firm bearing.
B.
Secure wall sheathing vertically parallel to wall studs, with ends staggered, over solid blocking.
Secure sheet edges over firm bearing.
C.
Secure subfloor and flat roof sheathing perpendicular to floor framing with end joints staggered.
Secure sheet edges over firm bearing. Attach sheathing with subfloor glue and nail as shown.
D.
Nail panel edges to framing members or blocking at least 1-1/2 inches thick. Space nails at
panel edges as indicated on drawings, or if not shown, in accordance with CBC requirements.
Place nails not less than 3/8 inches from panel edges and drive solidly into the support.
3.5
FASTENING
A.
In general, provide nail penetration into the piece receiving the point of not less than 1/2 the
length of the nail or spike provided; however, 16d nails may be used to connect two pieces of 2
inch (nominal) thickness.
B.
In diaphragms, the minimum penetration shall be 1-1/2 inches for 8d nails and 1-5/8 inches for
10d nails.
C.
Perform nailing without splitting wood, preboring as required; replace split members.
D.
Drill bolt holes 1/16 inches larger in diameter than the bolts being used; drill straight and true
from one side only.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 5
E.
Bolt threads must not bear on wood; use washers under head and nut where bolts bear on
wood; use washers under nuts.
F.
Lag screw anchorage embedment in piece lagged to shall not be less than 0.6 times lag screw
length nor less than 8 times lag screw diameter.
G.
Prebore holes for lag screws same diameter as root of thread; enlarge holes to shank diameter
for length of shank.
H.
Do not drive lag screws.
3.6
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
A.
Install miscellaneous blocking, furring, cants, nailing strips, framing and sheathing.
B.
Install members true, plumb, and level. Secure in place.
C.
Space miscellaneous framing and furring at 16 inches o.c.
D.
Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths.
3.7
TOLERANCES
A.
Framing Members: 1/4 inch maximum from true position.
B.
Surface Flatness of Floor: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 6
SECTION 06 1053
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
Plywood backing panels.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in
least dimension.
B.
Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1.
1.4
NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency.
For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before
and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.
For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content
of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1053 - 1
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is
representative of the material tested.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide
for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.2
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade
compliance issued by grading agency.
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19
percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame
spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of
significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with
the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any
time during the test.
1.
2.
Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fireretardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1053 - 2
3.
accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where
indicated.
Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less
when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where
exterior type is not indicated.
C.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood
after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
D.
Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of
each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by
inspection agency.
E.
For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations
that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
F.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Concealed blocking.
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in
connection with roofing.
Plywood backing panels.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
Blocking.
Nailers.
Cants.
B.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.
C.
For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber
of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will
interfere with its attachment and purpose.
D.
For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
2.4
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A.
Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in
thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1053 - 3
2.5
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.
1.
Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated,
or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying
with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B.
Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C.
Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing:
manufacturer for material being fastened.
ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring
backing panels.
1.
Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing
agency exposed to view.
C.
Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
1.
E.
Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where
framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips
not more than 16 inches o.c.
Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated
and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96
inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close
furred spaces.
Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at
ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not
inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width
as framing members and 2-inch nominal thickness.
Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to
limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below
partitions.
Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more
than 20 feet o.c.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1053 - 4
F.
Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
G.
Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying
with the following:
1.
H.
3.2
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails
snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous
rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by
spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1053 - 5
SECTION 06 2013
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Plywood siding.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Section 06 1000 "Rough Carpentry" for exterior carpentry work not exposed to view and
for framing exposed to view.
Section 06 1053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other
carpentry work not exposed to view.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application
details.
1.
2.
B.
1.4
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
Include copies of warranties from chemical-treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
Samples for Verification: For each species and cut of lumber and panel products, with 1/2 of
exposed surface finished; 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated wood., from ICC-ES.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification
marking is representative of the material tested.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 2013 - 1
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely
anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecast weather
conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be applied
without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
B.
Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade,
species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
1.
B.
2.2
For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade
stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: For applications indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article
that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and comply with testing requirements;
testing by a qualified testing agency.
B.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame
spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant
progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame
front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during
the test.
1.
2.
Exterior Type: Materials shall comply with testing requirements after being subjected to
accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898.
Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15
percent respectively.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 2013 - 2
C.
For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations
that do not contain colorants, and provide materials that do not have marks from spacer sticks
on exposed face.
D.
Do not use material that does not comply with requirements for untreated material or is warped
or discolored.
E.
Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
F.
2.3
For exposed plywood indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark back of each
piece.
Application: Where indicated.
PLYWOOD SIDING
A.
Plywood Type: APA-rated siding in panel sizes indicated.
B.
Thickness: 19/32 inch.
C.
Face Species: Match existing siding.
D.
Pattern: Texture 1-11; grooves 8 inches o.c.
E.
Surface: Match existing.
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to
penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches into wood substrate.
1.
2.
3.
For face-fastening siding, provide ringed-shank siding nails or hot-dip galvanized-steel
siding nails unless otherwise indicated.
For prefinished items, provide matching prefinished aluminum fasteners where face
fastening is required.
For applications not otherwise indicated, provide stainless-steel fasteners.
B.
Flashing: As recommended by siding manufacturer for installation and conditions indicated.
C.
Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834 Type OP, Grade NF and with applicable
requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants," recommended by sealant manufacturer and
manufacturer of substrates for intended application.
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
Back out or kerf backs of standing and running trim wider than 5 inches, except members with
ends exposed in finished work.
B.
Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of
lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 2013 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture
damaged, and mold damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B.
Prime lumber and moldings to be painted, including both faces and edges, unless factory
primed. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Section 09 9100
"Painting."
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately
seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
1.
B.
Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining exterior
finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch
maximum offset for reveal installation.
Coordinate exterior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it.
Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exterior finish
carpentry.
SIDING INSTALLATION
A.
Install siding to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Plywood Siding: Install panels with edges over framing or blocking. Nail at 6 inches o.c. at
panel perimeter and 12 inches o.c. at intermediate supports unless manufacturer recommends
closer spacing. Leave 1/16-inch gap between adjacent panels and 1/8-inch gap at perimeter,
openings, and horizontal joints unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer.
1.
2.
Seal butt joints at inside and outside corners and at trim locations.
Install continuous metal flashing at horizontal panel joints.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 2013 - 4
3.
4.
Apply battens and corner trim as indicated.
Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent by placing in grooves of siding pattern or
by concealing with applied trim or battens as detailed. Do not nail through overlapping
pieces.
C.
Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated on Drawings and as recommended by siding
manufacturer.
D.
Finish: Apply finish within two weeks of installation.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
3.6
Replace exterior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements.
Exterior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and
shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
CLEANING
A.
3.7
Clean exterior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
Touch up factory-
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction.
B.
Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 2013 - 5
SECTION 06 2023
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Plywood paneling.
Hardboard paneling.
Shelving.
Section 06 1053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking and other
carpentry work not exposed to view.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
MDO: Medium-density overlay. Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application
details.
1.
B.
For adhesives and glues used at Project site, include printed statement of VOC content.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with non-factory-applied finish,
with 1/2 of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels.
For each finish system and color of lumber and panel products with factory-applied finish,
50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 2023 - 1
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely
anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B.
Deliver finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet requirements
specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than
installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for
installation areas.
1.6
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until
building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and
HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy
levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and the following grading rules:
1.
2.
3.
B.
NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association, "Rules for the Measurement and
Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress."
WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, Standard No. 17, "Grading Rules for
West Coast Lumber."
WWPA: Western Wood Products Association, "Western Lumber Grading Rules."
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade,
species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
1.
For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade
stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency.
C.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
D.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 2023 - 2
2.2
PANELING
A.
Hardwood Veneer Plywood Paneling:
Manufacturer's stock hardwood plywood panels
complying with HPVA HP-1, made without urea-formaldehyde adhesive.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Face Veneer Species and Cut (Type WD-1): Rift-cut reclaimed walnut, per "Finish
Schedule."
Veneer Matching: Selected for similar color and grain.
Backing Veneer Species: Any hardwood compatible with face species.
Construction: Veneer core.
Thickness: 1/8 inch.
Panel Size: As indicated.
Glue Bond: Type II (interior).
Face Pattern: As indicated.
Finish: Transparent clear-coat finish.
Hardboard Paneling: Interior factory-finished hardboard paneling complying with AHA 135.5.
1.
2.
3.
Thickness: 1/4 inch.
Finish: Class I.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested according to ASTM E 84:
a.
b.
4.
2.3
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Match Architect's samples.
SHELVING
A.
Closet Shelving: MDO softwood plywood with solid-wood edge, 3/4 inch thick.
B.
Standards for Adjustable Shelf Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; powder-coat-finished steel.
C.
Adjustable Shelf Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04081 or B04091; powder-coat-finished steel.
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type,
size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment,
concealed where possible.
B.
Paneling Adhesive: Suitable for substrate and type of installation required.
1.
C.
Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is
recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer.
1.
Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 2023 - 3
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
Back out or kerf backs of wood-board paneling members except those with ends exposed in
finished work.
B.
Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of
lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture
damaged, and mold damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B.
Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in
installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by
manufacturer.
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately
seasoned, too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements, or with defective surfaces,
sizes, or patterns.
B.
Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed
shims where necessary for alignment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand
unless otherwise indicated.
Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior
finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch
maximum offset for reveal installation.
Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide
cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 2023 - 4
3.4
PANELING INSTALLATION
A.
Plywood Paneling: Select and arrange panels on each wall to minimize noticeable variations in
grain character and color between adjacent panels. Leave 1/4-inch gap to be covered with trim
at top, bottom, and openings. Install with uniform tight joints between panels.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Hardboard Paneling: Install according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Leave 1/4inch gap to be covered with trim at top, bottom, and openings. Butt adjacent panels with
moderate contact. Use fasteners with prefinished heads matching paneling color.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Attach panels to supports with manufacturer's recommended panel adhesive and
fasteners. Space fasteners and adhesive as recommended by panel manufacturer.
Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent.
Arrange panels with grooves and joints over supports. Fasten to supports with nails of
type and at spacing recommended by panel manufacturer. Use fasteners with
prefinished heads matching groove color.
Wood Stud or Furring Substrate: Install with 1-inch annular-ring shank hardboard nails.
Plaster or Gypsum-Board Substrate: Install with 1-5/8-inch annular-ring shank hardboard
nails.
Nailing: Space nails 4 inches o.c. at panel perimeter and 8 inches o.c. at intermediate
supports, unless otherwise required by manufacturer.
SHELVING INSTALLATION
A.
Install standards for adjustable shelf supports according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall
anchors. Space fasteners not more than 12 inches o.c.
B.
Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and
reinstalled. Install shelves, fully seated on supports.
3.6
ADJUSTING
A.
3.7
Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish
carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no
evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
CLEANING
A.
3.8
Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Restore damaged or soiled
areas and touch up factory-applied finishes, if any.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction.
B.
Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 2023 - 5
1.
2.
Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 2023 - 6
SECTION 06 4023
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Shop finishing of interior woodwork.
Interior standing and running trim.
Paneling.
Wood cabinets.
Section 06 1000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips
required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before
woodwork installation.
Section 12 3640 "Stone Countertops" for stone countertops attached to architectural
cabinets.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for
installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork
installation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories
and the following:
1.
B.
Installation Adhesives: Include printed statement of VOC content.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1.
2.
Show details full size.
Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 4023 - 1
3.
4.
5.
C.
Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures and other items
installed in architectural woodwork.
Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification
numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.
Apply WI-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Lumber and veneer representative of the full range of characteristics, with transparent
finish, not less than 50 sq. in., for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge.
Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8
by 10 inches for panels, for each finish system and color, with 1/2 of exposed surface
finished.
Plastic laminates for cabinets, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface
finish.
Thermoset decorative-panels, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface
finish, with edge banding on 1 edge.
Miter joints for standing trim.
Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.
D.
Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.
E.
Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: WI-certified compliance certificates.
F.
Qualification Data: For fabricator.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
C.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the AWS "Manual of Millwork" for
grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and
other requirements.
1.
1.6
Provide
WI-certified
compliance
labels
and
certificates
indicating
woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
that
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
"Project Conditions" Article.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 4023 - 2
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and
90 deg F and relative humidity between 17 and 50 percent during the remainder of the
construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
1.
1.8
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of WI's quality standard for each type
of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: As indicated in "Finish Schedule" on Drawings.
C.
Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Wood Products: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no
urea formaldehyde.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1,
Grade M-2, except for density.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive
containing no urea formaldehyde.
Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with
thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 4023 - 3
F.
2.2
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate for Cabinets: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not
indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type):
opening, self-closing.
B.
Back-Mounted Pulls and Knobs: BHMA A156.9, B02011.
C.
Adjustable Shelf: BHMA A156.9 with shelf rests, B04081.
D.
Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.
1.
2.
3.
BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of
Standard Duty (Grade 1, Grade 2, and Grade 3): Side mounted; full-extension type; zincplated steel with polymer rollers.
Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-overtravelextension type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides.
Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches high and 24
inches wide.
E.
Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
F.
Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
G.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1.
H.
2.3
Dark, Oxidized, Satin Bronze, Oil Rubbed: BHMA 613 for bronze base; BHMA 640 for
steel base; match Architect's sample.
For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product
class requirements in BHMA A156.9.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
2.4
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior
woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.
B.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation
areas.
C.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges of corners of
cabinets and edges of solid-wood lumber members to 1/16 inch radius.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 4023 - 4
D.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1.
E.
2.5
Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be
removed after trial fitting.
Verify that various parts fit as intended and check
measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings
before disassembling for shipment.
Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts
to remove splinters and burrs. Seal edges with a coat of varnish.
INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent-finished
architectural woodwork located in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Provide split species on trim that faces areas with different wood species, matching each
face of woodwork to species and cut of finish wood surfaces in areas finished.
B.
Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
C.
Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field
assembly.
D.
Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for
field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.
2.6
INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A.
Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.
B.
Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
C.
Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field
assembly.
D.
Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for
field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.
2.7
PANELING
A.
Flush Wood Paneling:
1.
Wood Species and Cut: As indicated.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 4023 - 5
a.
2.
B.
Panel-Matching Method: Blueprint Match panels within each separate area.
Plastic-Laminate Paneling:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.8
Lumber Trim and Edges: At fabricator's option, trim and edges indicated as solid
wood (except moldings) may be either lumber or veneered construction compatible
with grain and color of veneered panels.
Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:
Grade HGS, high-pressure decorative
laminate.
Panel Joints: Butt-jointed, straight seams.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and
textures of exposed laminate surfaces to match Architect's samples.
WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
WI Construction Style: Style A, Frameless.
B.
WI Construction Type: Type II, single-length sections to fit access openings.
C.
WI Door and Drawer Front Style: Reveal overlay.
D.
Reveal Dimension: As indicated.
E.
Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: As indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
2.9
Grain Direction: As indicated.
Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match.
Vertical Matching of Veneer Leaves: End match.
Veneer Matching within Room: Provide cabinet veneers in each room or other space
from a single flitch with doors, drawer fronts, and other surfaces matched in a sequenced
set with continuous match where veneers are interrupted perpendicular to the grain.
Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and
drawers, unless located directly under tops.
SHOP FINISHING
A.
Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
B.
General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer
only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
C.
Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1.
Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain
surfaces.
Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 4023 - 6
backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative
panels.
D.
Transparent Finish:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
WI Finish System 1b.: Acrylic lacquer.
WI Finish System 1c.: Varnish.
WI Finish System 1d.: Polyurethane.
WI Finish System 2: Water-reducible acrylic lacquer.
WI Finish System 3a.: Catalyzed lacquer.
WI Finish System 3b.: Catalyzed vinyl lacquer.
WI Finish System 4: Conversion varnish.
WI Finish System 5: Catalyzed polyurethane.
WI Finish System 6: Penetrating oil.
Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining (if any), apply paste wood filler to
open-grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood.
a.
11.
E.
Apply wash-coat sealer after staining and before filling.
Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
Opaque Finish:
1.
2.
3.
WI Finish System 4: Conversion varnish.
Color: Match Architect's sample.
Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
B.
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for
fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
B.
Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for
fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish
at cuts. Caulk spaces between woodwork items and substrates to which they are attached with
sealant specified in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 4023 - 7
E.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply
with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used
to install woodwork.
F.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
G.
Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use
pieces less than 96 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are
necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1.
2.
3.
H.
Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips. Do not
use face fastening, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
I.
2.
3.
3.3
Install flush paneling with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch vertical cup or bow and 1/8
inch in 96-inch horizontal variation from a true plane.
Wood Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1.
J.
Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and
finish same as wood base if finished.
Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing.
Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch
in 96 inches.
Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a
straight line.
Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16
inches o.c. with toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes
with matching filler where exposed.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 4023 - 8
SECTION 07 8413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.
Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system.
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1.4
Include location and design
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B.
Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in
compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.
C.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for penetration firestopping.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the
necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified
requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to
Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following
requirements:
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
07 8413 - 1
1.
2.
Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in
"Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following
requirements:
a.
1.6
Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing
and inspecting agency.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate
temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when
substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B.
Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural
means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration
firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.
B.
Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate
penetration firestopping.
C.
Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping
installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
Grace Construction Products.
Hilti, Inc.
Nelson Firestop Products.
3M Fire Protection Products.
USG Corporation.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A.
Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according
to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fireresistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
07 8413 - 2
compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if
any.
B.
Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg.
1.
2.
C.
Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined
per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch
wg.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Fire-resistance-rated walls include smoke-barrier walls and fire partitions.
F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
Horizontal assemblies include floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of
roof/ceiling assemblies.
F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to
install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by
penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency
for firestopping indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to
comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign
materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.
Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose
particles remaining from cleaning operation.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that
manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not
allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
07 8413 - 3
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B.
Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths
required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
3.4
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels.
Attach labels
permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be
visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical
fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to
surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.5
The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb.
Management of Any Damage."
Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
Date of installation.
Manufacturer's name.
Installer's name.
Notify Building
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of
testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.
C.
Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection
reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
3.6
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers
and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that
penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems
complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
07 8413 - 4
SECTION 07 9200
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by
reference to this Section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Applications between flexible sheet flashing and metal frames for doors and windows.
Acoustical sealant.
Joints in gypsum board, wood or plastic laminates.
Control joints in stone and tile.
Other horizontal or vertical applications:
Section 08 8000 "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
Section 09 3000 "Tiling" for sealing tile joints.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and waterresistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.
1.4
Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples
with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
C.
Product Certificates:
manufacturer.
D.
SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's
Sealant Validation Program.
For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
JOINT SEALANTS
07 9200 - 1
E.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
F.
Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods
resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in
"Quality Assurance" Article.
G.
Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:
1.
2.
Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
H.
Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application.
I.
Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a
qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
J.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for
installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
C.
Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for
testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint
substrates.
Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.
Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals"
Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36month period preceding the commencement of the Work.
1.
2.
3.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E 548.
Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to
ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for
compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and
cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
JOINT SEALANTS
07 9200 - 2
4.
E.
Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing
standard specifications and test methods.
Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their
adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
Conduct field tests for each application of each type of elastomeric and nonelastomeric
sealant and joint substrate.
Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative
present.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be
erected.
a.
Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant
Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193.
1)
5.
6.
F.
1.6
For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate
separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.
Repeat procedure for opposite side.
Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of
product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory
adhesion is obtained.
Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing
adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to
joint substrates during testing.
Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, in mockups of assemblies specified in
other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants, to verify selections made
under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
materials and execution.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.7
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer.
When joint substrates are wet.
Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint
substrates.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
JOINT SEALANTS
07 9200 - 3
1.
B.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint
sealants from the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by
structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Sealant Colors, General:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Provide sealant colors indicated on Drawings.
If sealant colors are not indicated on Drawings, and sealant type is available in
predetermined colors, provide Architect's choice of sealant color selected from
manufacturer's full range of color samples.
For sealant type available in custom colors, provide custom color to match Architect's
sample.
Applications between Flexible Sheet Flashing and Metal Frames for Doors and Windows:
Neutral cure, one-part silicone sealant.
1.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following, or equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Dow Corning 790; neutral cure, one-part sealant.
Dow Corning 795; neutral-cure, one-part adhesive/sealant.
Sika Corporation; Sikasil 995; one part, neutral cure silicone sealant.
GE SCS 2000 Silpruf; one-part silicone sealant.
Tremco TremGlaze S 500; one part, medium modulus, neutral curing silicone
sealant.
Acoustical Sealant: Non-hardening polysulfide sealant.
1.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following, or equal:
a.
b.
Tremco; Acoustical Sealant.
USG; Sheetrock Brand Acoustical Sealant.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
JOINT SEALANTS
07 9200 - 4
D.
Other Horizontal or Vertical Applications:
1.
Product: Porous or non-porous surfaces where sealant will not be covered by paint.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following, or equal:
a.
b.
2.
Product: Porous or non-porous surfaces where sealant will be painted.
compliance with requirements, provide one of the following, or equal:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Dow Corning; 786.
General Electric; 1702.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following, or equal:
a.
b.
General Electric; SCS2000 Silpruf.
Dow Corning; 795.
Control Joints in Stone and Tile.
following, or equal:
1.
2.3
Subject to
Joints in Gypsum Board, Wood or Plastic Laminates.
1.
F.
Subject to
Sikaflex; 2c/NS.
Tremco; Dymeric 240FC.
Pacific Polymers; Elasto-Thane 230MP.
Product: Mildew-resistant sealant for ceramic tile and plumbing fixtures.
compliance with requirements, provide one of the following, or equal:
a.
b.
E.
Dow Corning; 790 or 795.
General Electric; SCS2000 Silpruf.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dow Corning; 790, or equal.
JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A.
General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin),
O (open-cell material), B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types,
as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size
and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant
performance:
1.
C.
Use closed cell backer rods at horizontal joints.
Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying
with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at
temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size
and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to
optimum sealant performance.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
JOINT SEALANTS
07 9200 - 5
D.
2.4
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint
surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide selfadhesive tape where applicable.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Primer: VOC-compliant material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required
for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction jointsealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1.
2.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate
capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles
remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free
compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a.
b.
3.
Concrete.
Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
JOINT SEALANTS
07 9200 - 6
4.
Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Metal.
Glass.
Porcelain enamel.
Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B.
Joint Priming:
Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas
of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A.
General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C.
Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for
use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and
conditions indicated.
D.
Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1.
2.
3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
E.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.
F.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1.
2.
3.
G.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
JOINT SEALANTS
07 9200 - 7
beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint.
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1.
Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows:
a.
b.
2.
Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, Method B, Exposed Surface Finish Hand Pull Tab, Method C, FieldApplied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Flap, or Method D, Water Immersion in Appendix X1 in
ASTM C 1193, as appropriate for type of joint-sealant application indicated.
a.
3.
4.
b.
c.
6.
B.
For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately;
do this by extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.
Repeat procedure for opposite side.
Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying
with specified requirements. Record results in a field-adhesion-test log.
Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a.
5.
Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each type of elastomeric
sealant and joint substrate.
Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor
per elevation.
Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type
of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion
passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified
requirements.
Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were
installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether
joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant
configuration, and sealant dimensions.
Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same
procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean
and that new sealant contacts original sealant.
Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or
noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove
sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
JOINT SEALANTS
07 9200 - 8
requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated
requirements.
3.5
CLEANING
A.
3.6
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
JOINT SEALANTS
07 9200 - 9
SECTION 08 1113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Hollow-metal work for interior applications.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.
Section 09 9100 "Painting" for field-painting of hollow metal doors and frames.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMMHMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.
COORDINATION
A.
1.5
Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates,
and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions,
core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Elevations of each door type.
Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses.
Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
Details of each different wall opening condition.
Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 1113 - 1
1.6
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests
performed by a qualified testing agency.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit
and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.
1.
Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.
B.
Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
C.
Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum
4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to
permit air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.3
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based
on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials,
fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as
specified.
B.
Standard-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 1.
1.
2.
Physical Performance: Level C according to SDI A250.4.
Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.032 inch.
Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush.
Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,
polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's
discretion.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 1113 - 2
3.
Frames:
a.
b.
4.
C.
Exposed Finish: Prime.
Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At locations indicated in the Door and
Frame Schedule.
1.
2.
Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.
Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
4.
Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch.
Edge Construction:Model 1, Full Flush.
Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,
polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's
discretion.
Frames:
a.
b.
2.4
Materials: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch.
Construction: Knocked down.
Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.
Construction: Full profile welded.
Exposed Finish: Prime.
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for
exposed applications.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
D.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for
attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.
F.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
G.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting
of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion
characteristics.
H.
Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 8000 "Glazing."
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 1113 - 3
I.
2.5
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per
coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components,
and other deleterious impurities.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical,
fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site,
clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B.
Hollow-Metal Doors:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors:
Provide beveled or square edges at
manufacturer's discretion.
Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with inverted closures of same material as
face sheets.
Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of
same material as face sheets.
Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
as frames.
1.
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
E.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to
SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1.
2.
F.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where
indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.6
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted
door hardware.
Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation
of hollow-metal work for hardware.
Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollowmetal work.
Provide fixed frame moldings on secure side of interior doors and frames.
Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.
Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation
types indicated.
STEEL FINISHES
A.
Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 1113 - 4
1.
Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer
complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;
compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame
installation.
C.
Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the
Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B.
Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.
1.
Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout
containing anti-freezing agents.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 1113 - 5
3.
4.
In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1.
Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
D.
Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
At Bottom of Door: 3/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08 8000 "Glazing" and with hollowmetal manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
3.4
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not
more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.
C.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 1113 - 6
SECTION 08 1416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
Shop priming flush wood doors.
Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
Section 08 1113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for hollow metal door frames for firerated wood doors.
Section 09 9100 "Painting" for field finishing of wood doors.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for
openings.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Dimensions and locations of blocking.
Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
Dimensions and locations of cutouts.
Undercuts.
Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
Samples for Verification:
1.
Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges
representing actual materials to be used.
a.
2.
Provide Samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required.
Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 1416 - 1
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
C.
Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.6
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder
of construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL
A.
Quality Standard:
In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A,
"Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
B.
Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Particleboard-Core Doors:
1.
2.
D.
Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating
indicated.
Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by
outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated
without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent
seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2.
Provide doors with glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of
particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.
Mineral-Core Doors:
1.
Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced
quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 1416 - 2
2.
3.
Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved
for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting
hardware.
Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved
screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for
exposed edges.
a.
2.2
Screw-Holding Capability: 475 lbf per WDMA T.M.-10.
DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A.
Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Grade: Custom.
Faces: Any closed-grain hardwood of mill option.
Exposed Vertical Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood.
Core: Particleboard.
Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive
planed before veneering.
FABRICATION
A.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1.
B.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA156.115-W, and hardware templates.
1.
2.4
Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.
Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment
before factory machining.
SHOP PRIMING
A.
Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with
one coat of wood primer specified in Section 09 9100 "Painting."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.
1.
2.
Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,
and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
Reject doors with defects.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 1416 - 3
B.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware."
B.
Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1.
C.
3.3
Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.
Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
ADJUSTING
A.
Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B.
Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.
Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence
of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 1416 - 4
SECTION 08 1433
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Exterior stile and rail wood doors.
Finishing stile and rail wood doors.
Fitting stile and rail wood doors to frames and machining for hardware.
Section 08 8000 "Glazing" for glazing products and requirements.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
2.
3.
Include details of construction and glazing.
Include factory-finishing specifications.
For adhesives and composite wood materials, include documentation indicating that
products contain no urea formaldehyde.
B.
Shop Drawings: For stile and rail wood doors. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door;
elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data, including those
for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings (sticking); and other pertinent data.
C.
Samples for Verification: Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door
faces and edgings representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and
solid lumber required. Finish Sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
08 1433 - 1
B.
Package doors individually in opaque plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
C.
Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.6
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 17 and 50
percent during remainder of construction period.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or
workmanship, or have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch
section, within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial
Completion:
a.
Interior Doors: Five years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of stile and rail wood door from single manufacturer.
MATERIALS
A.
General: Use only materials that comply with referenced standards and other requirements
specified.
1.
Assemble exterior doors and sidelites, including components, with wet-use adhesives
complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and with ASTM D 5751 for joints other than
finger joints.
B.
Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do
not contain urea formaldehyde.
C.
Panel Products: Any of the following unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Particleboard made from wood particles, with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde,
complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
Medium-density fiberboard made from wood fiber, with binder containing no ureaformaldehyde, complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.
Hardboard complying with ANSI A135.4.
Veneer-core plywood, made with adhesive containing no urea-formaldehyde.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
08 1433 - 2
D.
2.3
Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201, for
Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted.
EXTERIOR STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
A.
Thermal Transmittance: Maximum whole fenestration product U-factor of 0.65 according to
AAMA 1503, ASTM E 1423, or NFRC 100.
B.
Exterior Stile and Rail Wood Doors: Exterior doors complying with WDMA I.S.6, "Industry
Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors," and with other requirements specified.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.4
Belentry Doors LLC.
International Door and Latch.
JELD-WEN, Inc.
Karona, Inc.
QSM Enterprise, Inc.
Simpson Door Company.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
Finish and Grade: [Transparent and Premium or Select] [Opaque and Standard].
Wood Species: [Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine] [Manufacturer's
standard softwood species and cut] <Insert species>.
Stile and Rail Construction: Edge-glued solid lumber or veneered edge- and end-glued
lumber.
Panel Construction: Edge-glued solid lumber or veneered panel product.
Raised-Panel Thickness: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than that required by
WDMA I.S.6 for design group indicated.
Molding Profile (Sticking): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Glass: Uncoated, clear, fully tempered float glass, 5.0 mm thick complying with
Section 08 8000 "Glazing."
Mark, label, or otherwise identify stile and rail wood doors as complying with WDMA I.S.6
and grade specified. Include panel design number if applicable.
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOOR FABRICATION
A.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA156.115-W, and hardware templates.
1.
Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining.
B.
Glazed Openings: Factory install glazing in doors, complying with Section 08 8000 "Glazing."
Install glass using manufacturer's standard elastomeric glazing sealant complying with
ASTM C 920. Secure glass in place with removable wood moldings. Miter wood moldings at
corner joints.
C.
Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and
quality of construction.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
08 1433 - 3
D.
2.5
Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors after fabrication with water-repellent preservative to
comply with WDMA I.S.4. Flash top of outswinging doors with manufacturer's standard metal
flashing.
FINISHING
A.
Finish wood doors at woodworking shop that are indicated to receive transparent finish.
B.
For doors indicated to be factory finished, comply with WDMA I.S.6A, "Industry Standard for
Architectural Stile and Rail Doors," and with other requirements specified.
1.
C.
Transparent Finish:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Finish faces and all four edges of doors, including mortises and cutouts. Stains and
fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
Grade: Premium.
Finish: WDMA TR-4 conversion varnish.
Staining: Match Architect's sample.
Sheen: [Satin] [Semigloss].
Opaque Finish:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Grade: Premium.
Finish: WDMA OP-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
Color: Match Architect's sample.
Sheen: [Satin] [Semigloss].
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.
1.
2.
B.
3.2
Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,
and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
Reject doors with defects.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware."
B.
Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
C.
Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
08 1433 - 4
rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises
after fitting and machining.
1.
2.
D.
3.3
Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide [1/4
inch] from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise
indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide [3/8 inch] from bottom of
door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.
Shop-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
Project site.
ADJUSTING
A.
Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B.
Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors
may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of
repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
08 1433 - 5
SECTION 08 3113
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes: Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, fire ratings, materials,
individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to
access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics according to the
following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1.
2.2
NFPA 288 for fire-rated access door assemblies installed horizontally.
FIRE-RATED ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A.
Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineral-fiber insulation
enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self-latching door with automatic closer and interior latch
release. Provide manufacturer's standard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size.
B.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.040 inch, 20 gage; factory prime finish.
C.
Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.
D.
Hinges: Manufacturer's standard.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08 3113 - 1
E.
Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:
1.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following manufacturers, or equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
F.
Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by cylinder lock and key.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than 1 hour.
Oversized Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:
1.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the basis-of-design product or
comparable product by one of the other listed manufacturers, or equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
G.
Basis-of-Design Product: Nystrom, Inc.; FRD Series.
Alfab, Inc.
J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by cylinder lock and key.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than 1 hour.
Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:
1.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following manufacturers, or equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
2.3
Nystrom, Inc.
Alfab, Inc.
J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Nystrom, Inc.
Alfab, Inc.
J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by cylinder lock and key.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than 1 hour.
NON-RATED ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A.
Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineral-fiber insulation
enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self-latching door with automatic closer and interior latch
release. Provide manufacturer's standard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size.
B.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.040 inch, 20 gage; factory prime finish.
C.
Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.
D.
Hinges: Manufacturer's standard.
E.
Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08 3113 - 2
1.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following manufacturers, or equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
F.
Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by cylinder lock and key.
Oversized Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:
1.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the basis-of-design product or
comparable product by one of the other listed manufacturers, or equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
G.
Basis-of-Design Product: Nystrom, Inc.; FRD Series.
Alfab, Inc.
J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by cylinder lock and key.
Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:
1.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following manufacturers, or equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
2.4
Nystrom, Inc.
Alfab, Inc.
J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Nystrom, Inc.
Alfab, Inc.
J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by cylinder lock and key.
MATERIALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating.
C.
Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.
D.
Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners:
ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
2.5
Hot-dip
galvanized
steel
according
to
FABRICATION
A.
General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08 3113 - 3
B.
Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
C.
Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish
attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports
indicated.
D.
Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed.
2.6
FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D.
Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes:
1.
Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free,
universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B.
Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
C.
Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.
D.
Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08 3113 - 4
SECTION 08 7100
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Related Divisions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Division 06 – door hardware installation
Division 07 – sealant at exterior thresholds
Division 08 – metal doors and frames, wood doors, integrated security
systems, specialty doors, storefront and glazed curtainwall systems.
Division 10 – operable partitions
Division 21 – fire and life safety systems
Division 28 – security access systems
Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated
elsewhere.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.2
Door hardware, including electric hardware.
Storefront and entrance door hardware.
Battery-powered electronic credential access control locks.
Card Access control system.
Wall or floor-mounted electromagnetic hold-open devices.
Power supplies for electric hardware.
Low energy door operators plus sensors and actuators.
Door position switches.
Point-to-point wiring diagrams for electric hardware.
Windows.
Cabinets, including open wall shelving and locks.
Signs.
Toilet accessories, including grab bars.
Installation.
Rough hardware.
Conduit, junction boxes & wiring.
Folding partitions.
Access doors and panels.
REFERENCES:
A.
Use date of standard in effect as of Bid date.
1.
2.
3.
American National Standards Institute – ANSI 156.18 – Materials and
Finishes.
a)
ANSI A156.18 Materials and Finishes
BHMA – Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
DHI – Door and Hardware Institute
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 -1
4.
NFPA – National Fire Protection Association
a)
b)
c)
5.
UL – Underwriters Laboratories
a)
b)
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
UL 305 – Panic Hardware
WHI – Warnock Hersey Incorporated State of California Building Code
Local applicable codes
SDI – Steel Door Institute
WI – Woodwork Institute
AWI – Architectural Woodwork Institute
NAAMM – National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
Abbreviations
1.
2.
1.3
NFPA 80 – Fire Doors and Windows
NFPA 105 – Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies
NFPA 252 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
Manufacturers: see table at 2.1.A of this section
Finishes: see 2.7 of this section.
SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
SUBMITTALS: Submit six copies of schedule per Section 01330. Only
submittals printed one sided will be accepted and reviewed. Organize vertically
formatted schedule into “Hardware Sets” with index of doors and headings,
indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.
Minimum 10pt font size. Include following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of hardware items.
Use BHMA Finish codes per ANSI A156.18.
Name, part number and manufacturer of each item.
Fastenings and other pertinent information.
Location of hardware set coordinated with floor plans and door schedule.
Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
Mounting locations for hardware.
Door and frame sizes, materials and degrees of swing.
List of manufacturers used and their nearest representative with address
and phone number.
Catalog cuts.
Point-to-point wiring diagrams.
Manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for electronic
hardware.
B.
Bid and submit manufacturer’s updated/improved item if scheduled item is
discontinued.
C.
Deviations: Highlight, encircle or otherwise identify deviations from “Schedule of
Finish Hardware” on submittal with notations clearly designating those portions
as deviating from this section.
D.
If discrepancy between drawings and scheduled material in this section, bid the
more expensive of the two choices, note the discrepancy in the submittal and
request direction from Architect for resolution.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 -2
1.4
E.
Substitutions per Division 1. Include product data and indicate benefit to the
Project. Furnish operating samples on request.
F.
Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with closeout documents, including keying
schedule, riser and point-to-point wiring diagrams, manufacturers’ installation,
adjustment and maintenance information, and supplier’s final inspection report.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Qualifications:
1.
Hardware supplier: direct factory contract supplier who employs a
certified architectural hardware consultant (AHC), available at reasonable
times during course of work for project hardware consultation to Owner,
Architect and Contractor.
a)
1.5
Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish
hardware. Detailing implies that the submitted schedule of
hardware is correct and complete for the intended function and
performance of the openings.
B.
Hardware: Free of defects, blemishes and excessive play. Obtain each kind of
hardware (latch and locksets, exit devices, hinges and closers) from one
manufacturer.
C.
Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or
special knowledge or effort.
D.
Fire-Rated Openings: NFPA 80 compliant. Hardware UL10C / UBC Standard 72 (positive pressure) compliant for given type/size opening and degree of label.
Provide proper latching hardware, non-flaming door closers, approved-bearing
hinges, and resilient seals. Coordinate with wood door section for required
intumescent seals. Furnish openings complete.
E.
Furnish hardware items required to complete the work in accordance with
specified performance level and design intent, complying with manufacturers’
instructions and code requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A.
Delivery: coordinate delivery to appropriate locations (shop or field).
1.
Permanent keys and cores: secured delivery direct to Owner’s
representative.
B.
Acceptance at Site: Items individually packaged in manufacturers’ original
containers, complete with proper fasteners and related pieces. Clearly mark
packages to indicate contents, locations in hardware schedule and door
numbers.
C.
Storage: Provide securely locked storage area for hardware, protect from
moisture, sunlight, paint, chemicals, dust, excessive heat and cold, etc.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 -3
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION:
A.
Where exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to finished shape or
size of members requiring hardware, provide suitable types having as nearly as
practical the same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect’s
approval.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of
proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security
and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and
function, regardless of omissions or conflicts in the information on the Contract
Documents. Furnish related trades with the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Check Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate
provisions will be made for proper hardware installation.
D.
Environmental considerations: segregate unused recyclable paper and paper
product packaging, uninstalled metals, and plastics, and have these sent to a
recycling center.
E.
Prior to submittal, carefully inspect existing conditions to verify finish hardware
required to complete Work, including sizes, quantities, existing hardware
scheduled for re-use, and sill condition material. If conflict between the
specified/scheduled hardware and existing conditions, submit request for
direction from Architect. Include date of jobsite visit in the submittal.
1.
1.7
Location of embedded and attached items to concrete.
Location of wall-mounted hardware, including wall stops.
Location of finish floor materials and floor-mounted hardware.
At masonry construction, coordinate with the anchoring and hollow metal
supplier prior to frame installation by placing a strip of insulation, wood, or
foam, on the back of the hollow metal frame behind the rabbet section for
continuous hinges, as well as at rim panic hardware strike locations,
silencers, coordinators, and door closer arm locations. When the frame is
grouted in place, the backing will allow drilling and tapping without dulling
or breaking the installer’s bits.
Locations for conduit and raceways as needed for electrical, electronic
and electro-pneumatic hardware items. Fire/life-safety system
interfacing. Point-to-point wiring diagrams plus riser diagrams to related
trades.
Manufacturers’ templates to door and frame fabricators.
Submittals prepared without thorough jobsite visit by qualified hardware
expert will be rejected as non-compliant.
WARRANTY:
A.
Part of respective manufacturers’ regular terms of sale. Provide manufacturers’
written warranties:
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 -4
1.8
1.
2.
3.
Locksets:
Extra Heavy Duty Cylindrical Lock:
Exit Devices:
4.
Closers:
5.
Other Hardware
Conduct these tests prior to request for certificate of substantial completion:
1.
2.
3.
PART 2
With installer present, test door hardware operation with climate control
system and stairwell pressurization system both at rest and while in full
operation.
With installer, access control contractor and electrical contractor present,
test electrical, electronic and electro-pneumatic hardware systems for
satisfactory operation.
With installer and electrical contractor present, test hardware interfaced
with fire/life-safety system for proper operation and release.
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS:
A.
Manufacturers and their abbreviations used in this schedule:
ADA
GLY
IVE
LCN
NGP
SCE
SCH
VON
2.2
Two years
COMMISSIONING:
A.
2.1
Three years
Ten Years
Three years mechanical
One year electrical
Ten years mechanical
Two years electrical
Adams Rite
Glynn-Johnson Hardware
H. B. Ives
LCN Closers
National Guard Products
Schlage Electronics
Schlage Lock Company
Von Duprin
HINGING METHODS:
A.
Drawings typically depict doors at 90 degrees, doors will actually swing to
maximum allowable. Use wide-throw conventional or continuous hinges as
needed up to 8 inches in width to allow door to stand parallel to wall for true
180-degree opening. Advise architect if 8-inch width is insufficient.
B.
Conform to manufacturer’s published hinge selection standard for door
dimensions, weight and frequency, and to hinge selection as scheduled. Where
manufacturer’s standard exceeds the scheduled product, furnish the heavier of
the two choices, notify Architect of deviation from scheduled hardware.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 -5
C.
Conventional Hinges: Steel or stainless steel pins and concealed bearings.
Hinge open widths minimum, but of sufficient throw to permit maximum door
swing.
1.
2.
D.
Outswinging exterior doors: non-ferrous with non-removable (NRP) pins
and security studs.
Non-ferrous material exteriors and at doors subject to corrosive
atmospheric conditions.
Continuous Hinges:
1.
Geared-type aluminum.
a)
b)
2.3
Use wide-throw units where needed for maximum degree of
swing, advise architect if commonly available hinges are
insufficient.
If units are used at storefront openings, color-coordinate hinge
finish with storefront color. Custom anodizing and custom
powdercoat finishes subject to Architect approval.
LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS:
A.
Mortise Locksets and Latchsets: as scheduled.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Chassis: cold-rolled steel, handing field-changeable without disassembly.
Universal lock case – 10 functions in one case.
Floating mounting tabs automatically adjusts to fit a beveled door edge.
Latchbolts: 0.75 inch throw stainless steel anti-friction type.
Lever Trim: through-bolted, accessible design, cast lever or solid
extruded bar type levers as scheduled. Filled hollow tube design
unacceptable.
a)
b)
c)
d)
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Furnish solid cylinder collars with wave springs. Wall of collar to cover
rim of mortise cylinder.
Thumbturns: accessible design not requiring pinching or twisting motions
to operate.
Deadbolts: stainless steel 1-inch throw.
Electric operation: Manufacturer-installed continuous duty solenoid.
Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with 1 inch deep box
construction, lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing.
Scheduled Lock Series and Design: Schlage L series, 06A design.
Certifications:
a)
b)
B.
Spindles: security design independent breakaway. Breakage of
outside lever does not allow access to inside lever’s hubworks to
gain wrongful entry.
Inside lever applied by screwless shank mounting – no exposed
trim mount screws.
Levers rotate up or down for ease of use.
Vandalgard locks: locked lever freely rotates down while
remaining securely locked. This feature prevents damage to
internal lock components when subjected to excessive force.
ANSI A156.13, 1994, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security.
ANSI/ASTM F476-84 Grade 31 UL Listed.
Extra Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks and Latches: as scheduled.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 -6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Chassis: cylindrical design, corrosion-resistant plated cold-rolled steel,
through-bolted.
Locking Spindle: stainless steel, integrated spring and spindle design.
Latch Retractors: forged steel. Balance of inner parts: corrosion-resistant
plated steel, or stainless steel.
Latchbolt: solid steel.
Backset: 2.75 inches typically, more or less as needed to accommodate
frame, door or other hardware.
Lever Trim: accessible design, independent operation, spring-cage
supported, minimum 2.00 inches clearance from lever mid-point to door
face.
Electric operation: Manufacturer-installed continuous duty solenoid.
Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with 1.00 inch deep box
construction, lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing.
Lock Series and Design: Schlage D series, “Rhodes” design.
Certifications:
a)
b)
C.
Standard Duty Cylindrical Locks and Latches: as scheduled.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Chassis: cylindrical design, corrosion-resistant plated cold-rolled steel,
through-bolted.
Locking Spindle: stainless steel, interlocking design.
Latch Retractors: forged steel. Balance of inner parts: corrosion-resistant
plated steel or stainless steel.
Backset: 2.75 inches typically, more or less as needed to accommodate
frame, door or other hardware.
Lever Trim: accessible design, independent operation, spring-cage
supported, minimum 2.00 inches clearance from lever mid-point to face of
door.
Lock Series and Design: Schlage AL series, “Saturn” design.
Certifications:
a)
b)
2.4
ANSI A156.2, 1994, Series 4000, Grade 1.
UL listed for A label and lesser class single doors up to 4 feet x 8
feet.
ANSI A156.2, 1994, Series 4000, Grade 2.
UL listed for A label and lesser class single doors up to 4 feet x 8 feet.
EXIT DEVICES / PANIC HARDWARE
A.
General features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Independent lab-tested 1,000,000 cycles.
Push-through push-pad design. No exposed push-pad fasteners, no
exposed cavities when operated. Return stroke fluid dampeners and
rubber bottoming dampeners, plus anti-rattle devices.
Deadlocking latchbolts, 0.75 inch projection.
End caps: impact-resistant, flush-mounted. No raised edges or lips to
catch carts or other equipment.
No exposed screws to show through glass doors.
Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with
all functions, no extra parts required to effect change of function.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 -7
7.
8.
9.
B.
Specific features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Releasable in normal operation with 15-pound maximum operating force
per UBC Standard 10-4, and with 32-pound maximum pressure under
250-pound load to the door.
Exterior doors scheduled with XP-series devices: Static load force
resistance of at least 2000 pounds.
Comply with CBC Section 1008.1.10.
Non-Fire Rated Devices: cylinder dogging.
Lever Trim: breakaway type, forged brass or bronze escutcheon min. 0.130
inch thickness, compression spring drive, match lockset lever design.
Rod and latch guards with sloped full-width kickplates for doors fitted with
surface vertical rod devices with bottom latches.
Fire-Labeled Devices: UL label indicating “Fire Exit Hardware”. Vertical rod
devices less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise scheduled.
Electrically Operated Devices: Single manufacturer source for electric
latch retraction devices, electrically controlled trim, power transfers,
power supplies, monitoring switches and controls.
CLOSERS
A.
Surface Closers: 4011/4111
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover and
cast iron body. Double heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece forged
piston, chrome-silicon steel spring.
ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date-of-manufacture code.
Independent lab-tested 10,000,000 cycles.
Non-sized and adjustable. Place closers inside building, stairs and
rooms.
Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with
particular header, door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware.
Advanced Variable Backcheck (AVB): where scheduled, these units
commence backcheck at approximately 45 degrees.
Adjustable to open with not more than 5.0-pounds pressure to open at
exterior doors and 5.0-pounds at interior doors. As allowed per California
Building Code, Section 1133B.2.5 and 1008.1.3, local authority may
increase the allowable pressure for fire doors to achieve positive latching,
but not to exceed 15-pounds.
Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and
backcheck, fourth valve for delayed action where scheduled.
Extra-duty arms (EDA) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units.
EDA arms: rigid main and forearm, reinforced elbow.
Exterior door closers: tested to 100 hours of ASTM B117 salt spray test,
furnish data on request.
Exterior doors: seasonal adjustments not required for temperatures form
120 degrees F to -30 degrees F, furnish checking fluid data on request.
Non-flaming fluid, will not fuel door or floor covering fires.
Pressure Relief Valves (PRV) not permitted.
Surface Closers: 1461
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 -8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
C.
Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover and
cast iron body. Double heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece forged
piston, chrome-silicon steel spring.
ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date-of-manufacture code.
Independent lab-tested 5,000,000 cycles.
Non-sized, non-handed and adjustable. Place closers inside building,
stairs and rooms.
Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with
particular header, door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware.
Adjustable to open with not more than 5.0-pounds pressure to open at
exterior doors and 5.0-pounds at interior doors. As allowed per California
Building Code, Section 1133B.2.5 and 1008.1.3, local authority may
increase the allowable pressure for fire doors to achieve positive latching,
but not to exceed 15-pounds.
Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and
backcheck, fourth valve for delayed action where scheduled.
Extra-duty arms (EDA) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units.
Exterior door closers: tested to 100 hours of ASTM B117 salt spray test,
furnish data on request.
Exterior doors: seasonal adjustments not required for temperatures from
120 degrees F to 0 degrees F, furnish checking fluid data on request.
Non-flaming fluid, will not fuel door or floor covering fires.
Pressure Relief Valves (PRV) not permitted.
LCN Senior Swing:
1.
2.
3.
Comply with ANSI/BHMA 156.19: Electric power-open and close
operation. Modular construction. Finished metal cover. Field-adjustable
opening force, opening speed, time-open, closing and latching speeds.
Door reopens and timing cycle restores if system reactuated during
closing cycle. Breakaway clutch protection from forced closing. Door,
frame, motor and drive train protected by attenuated initiation of opening
cycle.
Self-contained low-voltage power supply, terminal strip and sequencing
for incorporation of electric hardware with system operation.
Actuators: as scheduled
a)
b)
c)
2.6
Plate type: minimum 4 inches square or 4 inches diameter. At
each side of the opening, center one plate 7 inches to 8 inches
above the finish floor, and another at 30 inches to 44 inches
above the finish floor.
Vertical bar type: minimum 2 inches wide by 30 inches in height.
Locate bar with bottom 5 inches maximum above finish floor, and
top 35 inches minimum above finish floor.
Actuators of either type: display International Symbol of
Accessibility pictogram.
OTHER HARDWARE
A.
Automatic Flush Bolts: Low operating force design.
B.
Kick Plates: Four beveled edges, .050 inches minimum thickness, height and
width as scheduled. Sheet-metal screws of bronze or stainless steel to match
other hardware.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 -9
C.
Door Stops: Provide stops to protect walls, casework or other hardware.
4.
5.
E
G.
Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide wall type with
appropriate fasteners. Where wall type cannot be used, provide floor
type. If neither can be used, provide overhead type.
Locate overhead stops for maximum possible opening. Consult with Owner
for furniture locations. Minimum: 90deg stop / 95deg deadstop. Note
degree of opening in submittal.
Seals: Finished to match adjacent frame color. Resilient seal aterial:
polyurethane, polypropylene, nylon brush, silicone rubber or solid highgrade neoprene as scheduled. Do not furnish vinyl seal material. UL
label applied to seals on rated doors. Substitute products: certify that the
products equal or exceed specified material’s thickness and durability.
1.
Proposed substitutions: submit for approval.
2.
Solid neoprene: MIL Spec. R6855-CL III, Grade 40.
3.
Non-corroding fasteners at in-swinging exterior doors.
4.
Fire-rated Doors, Resilient Seals: UL10C / NFPA 252 positive-pressure
compliant. Coordinate with selected door manufacturers' and selected
frame manufacturers' requirements. Where rigid housed resilient seals
are scheduled in this section and the selected door manufacturer only
requires an adhesive-mounted resilient seal, furnish rigid housed seal at
minimum, or both the rigid housed seal plus the adhesive applied seal.
Adhesive applied seals alone are deemed insufficient for this project
where rigid housed seals are scheduled.
5.
Fire-rated Doors, Intumescent Seals: Furnished by selected door
manufacturer. Furnish fire-labeled opening assembly complete and in full
compliance with UL10C /NFPA 252 positive-pressure. Where required,
intumescent seals vary in requirement by door type and door manufacture
-- careful coordination required
Thresholds: As scheduled and per details. Comply with CBC Section
1133B.2.4.1. Substitute products: certify that the products equal or exceed
specified material’s thickness. Proposed substitutions: submit for approval.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Saddle thresholds: 0.125 inches minimum thickness.
Exteriors: Seal perimeter to exclude water and vermin. Use sealant
complying with requirements in Division 7 "Thermal and Moisture
Protection". Minimum 0.25 inch diameter fasteners and lead expansion
shield anchors, or Red-Head #SFS-1420 (or approved equivalent) Flat
Head Sleeve Anchors (SS/FHSL).
Fire-rated openings, 90-minutes or less duration: use thresholds to interrupt
floor covering material under the door where that material has a critical
radiant flux value less than 0.22 watts per square centimeter, per NFPA
253. Use threshold unit as scheduled. If none scheduled, request direction
from Architect.
Fire-rated openings, 3-hour duration: Thresholds, where scheduled, to
extend full jamb depth.
Plastic plugs with wood or sheet metal screws are not an acceptable
substitute for specified fastening methods.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 -10
6.
H.
Through-bolts: Do not use. Coordinate with wood doors; ensure provision of
proper blocking to support wood screws for mounting panic hardware and door
closers. Coordinate with metal doors and frames; ensure provision of proper
reinforcement to support machine screws for mounting panic hardware and door
closers.
1.
2.7
2.8
Fasteners: Generally, exposed screws to be Phillips or Robertson drive.
Pinned TORX drive at high security areas. Flat head sleeve anchors
(FHSL) may be slotted drive. Sheet metal and wood screws: full-thread.
Sleeve nuts: full length to prevent door compression.
Exception: surface-mounted overhead stops, holders, and friction stays.
I.
Silencers: Interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 4 for pairs of doors.
Leave no unfilled/uncovered pre-punched silencer holes. Intent: door bears
against silencers, seals make minimal contact with minimal compression – only
enough to effect a seal.
J.
Wall- & Floor-mounted electromagnetic door holders: LCN's SEM series or
approved equivalent. Incorporate into U.L. listed fire & life-safety system, doors
release to allow closure and latching when door's zone is in alarm state. Use
minimum projection required to allow door to open as widely as allowed by wall
conditions and projection of door hardware.
FINISH:
A.
Generally: BHMA 613 Oxidized and Oil Rubbed Bronze.
B.
Door closers: factory powder coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise
noted.
KEYING REQUIREMENTS:
A.
K.
Key System: Verify with Owner) Schlage Everest utility-patented keyway,
conventional cylinders with the exception of interchangeable core type operating
cylinders for panic hardware. Utility patent protection to extend at least until
2014. Key blanks available only from factory-direct sources, not available from
after-market key blank manufacturers. For estimate use factory GMK charge.
Initiate and conduct meetings(s) with Owner and I-R Security & Safety
Consultants representatives to determine system keyway(s), structure and
degree of geographic exclusivity. Furnish Owner’s written approval of the
system; do not order keys or cylinders without written confirmation of actual
requirements from the Owner. Contractor will install permanent cylinders/cores.
Keys
1.
2.
3.
Existing factory registered master key system
Non-I.C. construction keying: furnish inserted type partial key. At
substantial completion, remove inserts in Owner’s presence; demonstrate
consequent non-operability of construction key. Give all removed inserts
and all construction keys to Owner, provide accounting for all the pieces.
I. C. Construction keying: furnish temporary keyed-alike cylinders and
cores. Remove at substantial completion and install permanent cylinders
and cores in Owner’s presence. Demonstrate that construction key no
longer operates.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 -11
L.
4.
Temporary cylinders/cores remain supplier’s property.
5.
Furnish 10 construction keys.
6.
Furnish 2 construction insert extractor tool 35-057.
7.
Furnish 2 construction control keys.
Key Cylinders: furnish utility patented, 6-pin solid brass construction.
M.
Cylinders/Cylinder cores: furnish keyed at factory of lock manufacturer where
permanent records are maintained. Locks and cylinders same manufacturer.
N.
Permanent keys: furnish secured shipment direct from point of origination to
Owner.
1.
O.
PART 3 3.1
EXECUTION
ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS:
A.
3.2
For estimate: 3 keys per change combination, 5 master keys per group, 5
grand-master keys, 3 control keys.
2.
For estimate: VKC stamping plus “DO NOT DUPLICATE”.
Bitting List: furnish secured shipment direct from point of origination to Owner
upon completion.
Can read and understand manufacturers’ templates, suppliers’ hardware
schedule and printed installation instructions. Available to meet with
manufacturers’ representatives and related trades to discuss installation of
hardware.
PREPARATION:
A.
Ensure that walls and frames are square and plumb before hardware
installation. Make corrections before commencing hardware installation.
Installation denotes acceptance of wall/frame condition.
A.
Locate hardware per SDI-100 and applicable building, fire, life-safety,
accessibility, and security codes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
Notify Architect of code conflicts before ordering material.
Locate latching hardware between 34 inches to 44 inches above the
finished floor, per California Building Code, Section 1008.1.9.2 and
1133B.2.5.2.
Locate panic hardware between 36 inches to 44 inches above the
finished floor.
Where new hardware is to be installed near existing doors/hardware
scheduled to remain, match locations of existing hardware.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install hardware per manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Do not
install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate.
Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce
attachment substrate for proper installation and operation. Remove and reinstall
or replace work deemed defective by Architect.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 -12
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4.
B.
Locate floor stops no more than 4 inches from walls and not within paths of
travel. See paragraph 2.2 regarding hinge widths, door should be well clear of
point of wall reveal. Point of door contact no closer to the hinge edge than half
the door width. Where situation is questionable or difficult, contact Architect for
direction.
C.
Drill pilot holes for fasteners in wood doors and/or frames.
D.
Lubricate and adjust existing hardware scheduled to remain. Carefully remove
and give to Owner items not scheduled for reuse.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust and check for proper operation and function. Replace units, which
cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.
3.
C.
Hardware damaged by improper installation or adjustment methods:
repair or replace to Owner’s satisfaction.
Adjust doors to fully latch with no more than 1 pound of pressure.
Adjust delayed-action closers on fire-rated doors to fully close from fullyopened position in no more than 10 seconds.
Adjust door closers per 1.9 this section.
Fire-rated doors:
1.
Wood doors: adjust to 0.125 inches clearance at heads, jambs, and
meeting stiles.
Steel doors: adjust to 0.063 inches minimum to 0.188 inches maximum
clearance at heads, jambs, and meeting stiles.
Adjust wood and steel doors to 0.75 inches maximum clearance
(undercut) above threshold or finish floor material under door.
Final inspection: Installer to provide letter to Owner that upon completion
installer has visited the Project and has accomplished the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Gaskets: install jamb-applied gaskets before closers, overhead stops, rim
strikes, etc; fasten hardware over and through these seals. Install
sweeps across bottoms of doors before astragals, cope sweeps around
bottom pivots, trim astragals to tops of sweeps.
When hardware is to be attached to existing metal surface and insufficient
reinforcement exists, use RivNuts, NutSerts or similar anchoring device
for screws.
Use manufacturers' fasteners furnished with hardware items, or submit
Request for Substitution with Architect.
Replace fasteners damaged by power-driven tools.
Has re-adjusted hardware.
Has evaluated maintenance procedures and recommend changes or
additions, and instructed Owner’s personnel.
Has identified items that have deteriorated or failed.
Has submitted written report identifying problems.
DEMONSTRATION:
A.
Demonstrate mechanical hardware and electrical, electronic and pneumatic
hardware systems, including adjustment and maintenance procedures.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 -13
3.6
3.7
PROTECTION/CLEANING:
A.
Cover installed hardware, protect from paint, cleaning agents, weathering,
carts/barrows, etc. Remove covering materials and clean hardware just prior to
substantial completion.
B.
Clean adjacent wall, frame and door surfaces soiled from installation /
reinstallation process.
SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE
A.
See door schedule in drawings for hardware set assignments.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 -14
SPEXTRA: 87387
HARDWARE SET NO. 01
PROVIDE EACH PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
2 EA
CONT. HINGE
112HD EPT
2 EA
POWER TRANSFER
EPT10
1 EA
ELEC PANIC
LX-RX-QEL+-3547A-EO
HARDWARE
1 EA
ELEC PANIC
LX-RX-QEL+-3547A-T-360T
HARDWARE
2 EA
MORTISE CYLINDER
20-061-ICX
2 EA
FSIC CORE
23-030
2 EA
90 DEG OFFSET PULL
8190 12" O
1 EA
CONC. AUTO
2853 STD/OP2 MS
OPERATOR
ACTUATOR, WALL
8310-836T
2 EA
MOUNT
1 EA
THRESHOLD
AS DETAILED
1 EA
KEYSWITCH
653-04 NS L2
2 EA
DOOR CONTACT
7764
1 EA
POWER SUPPLY
PS902 900-4RL
1 EA
DIAGRAM
POINT TO POINT WIRING DIAGRAM
FINISH
313AN
695
313
MFR
IVE
VON
VON
313
VON
613
606
613
ANDKB
SCH
SCH
IVE
LCN
630
LCN
AL
630
628
LGR
NGP
SCE
SCE
VON
VON
WEATHER SEALS AND DOOR BY DOOR MANUFACTURER.
KEYSWITCH WILL BE USED TO DOG AND UN-DOG ELECTRIC PANIC DEVICES.
CONNECT EXTERIOR AUTO OPERATOR ACTUATOR TO EXIT DEVICE LX SWITCHES.
WIRING BY OTHERS.
HARDWARE SET NO. 02
PROVIDE EACH PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
6 EA
HINGE
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
1 SET
AUTO FLUSH BOLT
FB41P
1 EA
DUST PROOF STRIKE
DP1
1 EA
CLASSROOM LOCK
ND70PD RHO
1 EA
COORDINATOR
COR X FL
2 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1461 DEL
2 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 10" X 1" LDW B4E
FIRE/LIFE WALL MAG
SEM7830
2 EA
SEALS
5050B
1 SET
1 EA
ASTRAGAL
158SA
1 EA
EDGE SEAL
5060B
1 EA
INTUMESCENT SEALS BY DOOR
MANUFACTURER
FINISH
640
613
613
613
711
695
613
695
BRN
CL
BRN
MFR
IVE
IVE
IVE
SCH
IVE
LCN
IVE
LCN
NGP
NGP
NGP
B/O
CONNECT MAG HOLDERS TO FIRE LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 -15
HARDWARE SET NO. 03
PROVIDE EACH PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
6 EA
HINGE
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
1 SET
AUTO FLUSH BOLT
FB41P
1 EA
DUST PROOF STRIKE
DP1
1 EA
CLASSROOM LOCK
ND70PD RHO
COORDINATOR
COR X FL
1 EA
2 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1461 DEL
2 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 10" X 1" LDW B4E
2 EA
FLOOR STOP
FS436
1 SET
SEALS
5050B
1 EA
ASTRAGAL
158SA
EDGE SEAL
5060B
1 EA
1 EA
INTUMESCENT SEALS BY DOOR
MANUFACTURER
FINISH
640
613
613
613
711
695
613
613
BRN
CL
BRN
MFR
IVE
IVE
IVE
SCH
IVE
LCN
IVE
IVE
NGP
NGP
NGP
B/O
FINISH
640
613
613
711
SPBLK
695
613
695
BRN
CL
BRN
MFR
IVE
IVE
SCH
IVE
IVE
LCN
IVE
LCN
NGP
NGP
NGP
HARDWARE SET NO. 04
PROVIDE EACH PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
6 EA
HINGE
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
1 SET
AUTO FLUSH BOLT
FB32
1 EA
CLASSROOM LOCK
ND70PD RHO
1 EA
COORDINATOR
COR X FL
2 EA
MOUNTING BRACKET
MB
2 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1461 DEL EDA
2 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 10" X 1" LDW B4E
2 EA
FIRE/LIFE WALL MAG
SEM7830
1 SET
SEALS
5050B
1 EA
ASTRAGAL
158SA
1 EA
EDGE SEAL
5060B
CONNECT MAG HOLDERS TO FIRE LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 -16
HARDWARE SET NO. 05
PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
HINGE
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
3 EA
1 EA
ENTRANCE/OFFICE
ND50PD RHO
LOCK
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1461
1 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
1 EA
FLOOR STOP
FS436
SEALS
5050B
1 SET
FINISH
640
613
MFR
IVE
SCH
695
613
613
BRN
LCN
IVE
IVE
NGP
FINISH
640
313
613/313
613
606
695
613
695
BRN
BRN
MFR
IVE
VON
VON
SCH
SCH
LCN
IVE
LCN
NGP
NGP
B/O
FINISH
640
613
613
613
711
SPBLK
695
613
613
BRN
CL
MFR
IVE
IVE
IVE
SCH
IVE
IVE
LCN
IVE
IVE
NGP
NGP
HARDWARE SET NO. 06
PROVIDE EACH PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
6 EA
HW HINGE
3CB1HW 4.5 X 4.5
1 EA
FIRE EXIT HARDWARE
9827-EO-F-LBR-499F
1 EA
FIRE EXIT HARDWARE
9827-L-F-996-06-613
1 EA
RIM CYLINDER
20-057-ICX
1 EA
FSIC CORE
23-030
2 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1461 DEL EDA
2 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 10" X 1" LDW B4E
2 EA
FIRE/LIFE WALL MAG
SEM7830
1 SET
SEALS
5050B
1 EA
EDGE SEAL
5060B
EA
INTUMESCENT SEALS BY DOOR
MANUFACTURER
CONNECT MAG HOLDERS TO FIRE LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM.
HARDWARE SET NO. 07
PROVIDE EACH PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
6 EA
HINGE
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
1 SET
AUTO FLUSH BOLT
FB41P
1 EA
DUST PROOF STRIKE
DP1
1 EA
CLASSROOM LOCK
ND70PD RHO
1 EA
COORDINATOR
COR X FL
2 EA
MOUNTING BRACKET
MB
2 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1461 DEL EDA
2 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 10" X 1" LDW B4E
2 EA
FLOOR STOP
FS436
1 SET
SEALS
5050B
1 EA
ASTRAGAL
158SA
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 -17
HARDWARE SET NO. 08
PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
HINGE
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
3 EA
1 EA
STOREROOM LOCK
ND80PD RHO
1 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
1 EA
WALL STOP
WS407CCV
3 EA
SILENCER
SR64
FINISH
640
613
613
613
GRY
MFR
IVE
SCH
IVE
IVE
IVE
FINISH
613
613
MFR
IVE
SCH
695
613
613
613
BRN
LCN
IVE
IVE
GLY
NGP
FINISH
640
613
695
613
613
BRN
MFR
IVE
SCH
LCN
IVE
IVE
NGP
FINISH
640
613
613
613
BRN
MFR
IVE
SCH
IVE
IVE
NGP
HARDWARE SET NO. 09
PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
HINGE
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
3 EA
1 EA
PRIVACY W/DB & IND
L9496P OCCUPIED/VACANT 06A L583363
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1461 DEL
1 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
1 EA
MOP PLATE
8400 4" X 1" LDW B4E
1 EA
O.H. STOP
90S
1 SET
SEALS
5050B
HARDWARE SET NO. 10
PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
3 EA
HINGE
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
1 EA
CLASSROOM LOCK
ND70PD RHO
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
1461 DEL
1 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
1 EA
WALL STOP
WS407CCV
1 SET
SEALS
5050B
HARDWARE SET NO. 11
PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
3 EA
HINGE
3CB1 4.5 X 4.5
1 EA
CLASSROOM LOCK
ND70PD RHO
1 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E
1 EA
WALL STOP
WS407CCV
1 SET
SEALS
5050B
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 -18
MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
CATALOG CUTS AND
HARDWARE
SCHEDULE FOR JOB
DRIVERS,
WRENCHES, ETC
INST/MAINT/ADJUST
MENT INFO EA ITEM
1
EA
BINDER
1
EA
SPECIAL TOOLS
1
EA
BINDER
FINISH
MFR
HANDING
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 -19
B113.1
B113.2
B113.3
B120.1
B123.1
B203.1
B204.1
B207.1
B208.1
B208.2
B209.1
B209A.1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
08
08
07
06
07
09
10
05
04
11
03
02
HW Set
SGL
SGL
PR
PR
PR
SGL
SGL
SGL
PR
SGL
PR
PR
Mode
3' 0"
3' 0"
5' 0"
6' 0"
6' 0"
3' 0"
3' 0"
3' 0"
6' 0"
2' 10"
6' 0"
6' 0"
Width
Project: Oakmont Gardens Interior Renovations
Supplier: Allegion, PLC
Mark #
Qty
6' 8"
6' 8"
6' 8"
6' 8"
6' 8"
6' 8"
6' 8"
6' 8"
6' 8"
6' 8"
6' 8"
6' 8"
Height
1 3/4"
1 3/4"
1 3/4"
1 3/4"
1 3/4"
1 3/4"
1 3/4"
1 3/4"
1 3/4"
1 3/8"
1 3/4"
1 3/4"
Thick
HMD
HMD
WD
WD
WD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
WD
WD
Door
NONRTD
NONRTD
NONRTD
20MIN
NONRTD
90MIN
20MIN
20MIN
20MIN
NONRTD
20MIN
20MIN
Rating
Control #: 87387
Version #: 2
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
Frame
Door Schedule
DINING ROOM
PRIVATE
DINING
PRIVATE
DINING
WALKER
STORAGE
STORAGE
WOMEN'S
TOILET
MEN'S TOILET
ARTS & CRAFT
ROOM
MARKENTING
OFFICE
STORAGE
ACTIVITY
ROOM
ACTIVITY
ROOM
Inside Loc
Print Date: Apr 28 2014 5:59PM EST
Ver Date: Apr 28 2014 2:59PM EST
HALL
HALL
DINING ROOM
UPPER LOBBY
DINING ROOM
VESTIBULE
VESTIBULE
HALL
HALL
ACTIVITY
ROOM
HALL
HALL
Outside Loc
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 08 8000
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in
other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1.
2.
1.3
Doors.
Tempered glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Deterioration of Mirrors: Defects developed from normal use that are attributable to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to mirror manufacturer's written instructions. Defects
include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film.
B.
Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in
referenced glazing publications.
C.
Glass Thicknesses:
ASTM C 1036.
1.4
Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to
the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to
remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
1.
C.
Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
Provide mirrors that will not fail under normal usage. Failure includes glass breakage and
deterioration attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GLAZING
08 8000 - 1
1.5
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of
silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating
components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions.
Mirror mastic.
Mirror hardware.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to
other work.
C.
Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test Reports: From mirror manufacturer indicating that mirror
mastic was tested for compatibility and adhesion with mirror backing and substrates on which
mirrors are installed.
D.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
E.
Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use
same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.6
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For installers.
B.
Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.
C.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for insulating glass, glazing sealants, and glazing gaskets.
1.
D.
1.7
For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations
within previous 36-month period.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are
certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
B.
Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories:
Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer for each product and installation method.
C.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1.
GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to
this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this
Section or in referenced standards.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GLAZING
08 8000 - 2
2.
GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on
the Care and Handling of Mirrors."
D.
Safety Glazing Products: For tempered mirrors, provide products complying with testing
requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
E.
Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing
with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass,
thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
F.
Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least
one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.9
Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to
glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or
other causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1.
1.10
A.
Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by
mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions"
Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated
below:
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum.
thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
B.
Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated
float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated,
provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where fully
tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
Provide glass lites in
APRIL 28, 2014
GLAZING
08 8000 - 3
C.
Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated
below:
1.
2.2
For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of thickness indicated.
GLASS PRODUCTS
A.
Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise
indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
1.
2.
2.3
For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).
MIRROR MANUFACTURERS
A.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mirrors by one of the following, or equal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.4
Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc.
Gardner Glass Products.
Gilded Mirrors, Inc.
Guardian Industries Corp.
Independent Mirror Industries, Inc.
Lenoir Mirror Company.
Stroupe Mirror Co., Inc.
Sunshine Mirror.
Virginia Mirror Company, Inc.
Walker Glass Co., Ltd.
SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRROR MATERIALS
A.
Tempered Clear Glass Mirrors: Comply with ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, for blemish
requirements in annealed float glass before silver coating is applied, for coating requirements,
and with other requirements not affected by tempering process; and comply with ASTM C 1048
for Kind FT, Condition A, tempered float glass before silver coating is applied.
1.
B.
Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm.
Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting
mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with
glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following, or equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Franklin International; Titebond Division.
Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.
Macco Adhesives; Liquid Nails Division.
OSI Sealants, Inc.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GLAZING
08 8000 - 4
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.5
Palmer Products Corporation.
Pecora Corporation.
Royal Adhesives & Sealants; Gunther Mirror Mastics Division.
Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.
GLAZING GASKETS
A.
Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.
Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.
Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.
GLAZING SEALANTS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.7
Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: Match Architect's samples.
Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass
manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
F.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GLAZING
08 8000 - 5
2.8
MIRROR HARDWARE
A.
Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to
produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths
required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece.
1.
Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8 and 7/8
inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch.
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following,
or equal:
1)
2)
3)
2.
Top Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/8 and 1 inch in
height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch.
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following,
or equal:
1)
2)
3)
3.
2.9
Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.; CRL Standard "J" Channel.
Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Aluminum Shallow Nose "J" Moulding
Lower Bar.
Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Heavy Gauge Aluminum Shallow Nose "J"
Moulding Lower Bar.
Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.; CRL Deep "J" Channel.
Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Aluminum Deep Nose "J" Moulding Upper
Bar.
Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Heavy Gauge Aluminum Deep Nose "J"
Moulding Lower Bar.
Finish: Clear bright anodized.
FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A.
Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
B.
Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
2.10
MONOLITHIC-GLASS
A.
Glass Type: Clear heat-strengthened and fully tempered float glass; 1/4 inch thick.
B.
Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished.
1.
Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or
atmospheric penetration of glass coating.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GLAZING
08 8000 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.2
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
Presence and functioning of weep systems.
Minimum required face and edge clearances.
Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B.
Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so
that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave
visible marks in the completed work.
3.3
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B.
Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to
provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant
thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
C.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance.
D.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
E.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GLAZING
08 8000 - 7
1.
2.
Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of
tape.
H.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
J.
Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
K.
Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or
gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when
installation is subjected to movement.
L.
Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
M.
Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air
circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.
N.
For wall-mounted mirrors, install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Provide setting blocks 1/8 inch thick by 4 inches
long at quarter points. To prevent trapping water, provide, between setting blocks, two
slotted weeps not less than 1/4 inch wide by 3/8 inch long at bottom channel.
Top Channel/Cleat and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Fasten J-channel directly to wall
and attach top trim to continuous cleat fastened directly to wall.
Mirror Clips: Place a felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip to prevent spalling
of mirror edges. Locate clips so they are symmetrically placed and evenly spaced.
Install mastic as follows:
a.
b.
c.
3.4
Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of
mirrors and backing material.
Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage
and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.
After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a
minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface.
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A.
Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings
exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B.
Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed
and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GLAZING
08 8000 - 8
corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight
seal without developing bending stresses in glass.
Seal gasket joints with sealant
recommended by gasket manufacturer.
C.
Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressureglazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to
produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D.
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.5
SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A.
Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding
into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers
and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge
clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.6
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GLAZING
08 8000 - 9
SECTION 09 2900
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Interior gypsum board.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Section 09 3000 "Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic
tile.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
1.5
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack
panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations:
Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C.
Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GYPSUM BOARD
09 2900 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A.
2.3
Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and
that correspond with support system indicated.
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following, or equal:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
C.
Thickness: 1/2 inch.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and
mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Thickness: 5/8 inch.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
E.
Thickness: 1/2 inch.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
D.
American Gypsum.
National Gypsum Company.
USG Corporation.
Core: As indicated.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GYPSUM BOARD
09 2900 - 2
2.
Shapes:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following, or equal:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
2.5
Cornerbead.
Bullnose bead.
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
Fry Reglet Corp.
Gordon, Inc.
Pittcon Industries.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of
ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.
Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials
specified.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
2.
C.
Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1.
2.
Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,
use setting-type taping compound.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
a.
3.
4.
5.
2.6
Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GYPSUM BOARD
09 2900 - 3
C.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1.
D.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.
Products:
equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following, or
Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant.
Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC.
Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.
USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent
panels not less than one framing member.
C.
Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F.
Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GYPSUM BOARD
09 2900 - 4
1.
2.
3.
Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.
G.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H.
Attachment:
1.
2.
I.
3.3
Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open
(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner
construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension
lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or
provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Wallboard Type: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
Type X: As indicated on Drawings.
Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.
Single-Layer Application:
1.
2.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end
joints.
a.
3.
4.
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end
joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GYPSUM BOARD
09 2900 - 5
3.4
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.
C.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.5
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated.
LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
intended to receive tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels:
ASTM C 840:
1.
2.
Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings.
Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
a.
3.
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 9100 "Painting."
Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.
a.
3.6
Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 9100 "Painting."
PROTECTION
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other
non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall
application.
B.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GYPSUM BOARD
09 2900 - 6
2.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GYPSUM BOARD
09 2900 - 7
SECTION 09 3000
TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Ceramic tile.
Dimension stone tile.
Waterproof membrane.
Crack isolation membrane.
Tile backing panels.
Metal edge strips.
Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and
isolation joints in tile surfaces.
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1
apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.
B.
ANSI A108 Series:
ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B,
ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9,
ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15,
ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard
Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."
C.
Dimension Stone Tile: Modular stone units less than 3/4 inch thick.
D.
Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.
E.
Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.
F.
Polished Finish: Smooth surface that produces sharp, mirror-like reflections. Reflected images
of overhead fluorescent tubes have straight lines without visible distortion when viewed at arm's
length.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TILING
09 3000 - 1
G.
Honed Finish: Smooth, nonreflective surface similar to that produced by grinding with a 400- to
1200-grit abrasive; with a gap not exceeding 0.005 inch when faces are tested for flatness with
a 24-inch straightedge.
H.
Sand-Rubbed Finish: Uniform, fine-textured surface similar to that produced by grinding with a
40-grit abrasive; with a gap not exceeding 1/32 inch when faces are tested for flatness with a
24-inch straightedge.
I.
Thermal Finish: Uniform, coarse-textured surface produced by thermal shock; with a gap not
exceeding 3/16 inch when faces are tested for flatness with a 24-inch straightedge.
J.
Natural-Cleft Finish: Uneven surface produced by splitting stone along a natural cleavage plane;
without visible tool marks and with a gap not exceeding 3/16 inch when faces are tested for
flatness with a 24-inch straightedge.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.
For adhesives and sealants, include printed statement of VOC content.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and
locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile
surfaces.
C.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and
composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12
inches square, but not fewer than 4 tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors
approved for completed Work.
Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.
Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths.
Edge and transition strips in 6-inch lengths.
D.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
E.
Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.
F.
Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source or
producer.
1.
Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent
quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TILING
09 3000 - 2
B.
Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality
for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate
from one source or producer.
C.
Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this
Section from a single manufacturer for each product:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
1.6
Crack isolation membrane.
Stone thresholds.
Joint sealants.
Cementitious backer units.
Metal edge strips.
Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels
intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.
B.
Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination can be avoided.
D.
Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
E.
Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated
surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding
surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types,
compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1.
Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TILING
09 3000 - 3
B.
ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02,
ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA
installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.
C.
Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and
package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from
other packages and match approved Samples.
D.
Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard
with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
1.
E.
2.2
Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile
assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is
suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.
Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect
exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous
film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the
following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:
1.
2.3
Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.
TILE PRODUCTS
A.
Products: Refer to the "Finish Schedule" on Drawings for products, including styles,
dimensions, colors, patterns and finishes.
1.
B.
Tile Type: Factory-mounted ceramic mosaic tile.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Composition: Vitreous or impervious natural clay or porcelain.
Tile Color and Pattern: Match Architect's sample.
Grout Color: Match Architect's sample.
Trim Units:
Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where
applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile.
Tile Type: Glazed wall tile.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings, or equal.
Tile Color and Pattern: Match Architect's sample.
Grout Color: Match Architect's sample.
Trim Units:
Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where
applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile.
Accessories: Provide vitreous china accessories of type and size indicated, suitable for
installing by same method as adjoining wall tile.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TILING
09 3000 - 4
2.4
STONE PRODUCTS
A.
Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide those indicated.
B.
Regionally Manufactured Materials: Stone tiles shall be manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site.
C.
Abrasion Resistance of Stone Tile for Floors: Provide stone with a value of not less than 10
according to ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241/C 241M.
D.
Provide stone products that are free of defects impairing their function for use indicated,
including cracks, seams, and starts.
E.
Pattern Orientation: For stone varieties with a directional pattern, provide tile with pattern
randomly oriented at various angles to sides of tiles.
F.
Stone Tile Type: Refer to the "Finish Schedule" on Drawings for products, including styles,
colors, patterns and finishes.
2.5
TILE BACKING PANELS
A.
Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325, in maximum lengths available to
minimize end-to-end butt joints.
1.
Products:
equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
2.6
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following, or
C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990.
Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.
FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board.
USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
Thickness: As indicated.
WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
A.
General:
Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is
recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and
accessories recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or
elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement.
1.
Products:
equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following, or
Boiardi Products; a QEP company; Elastiment 344 Reinforced Waterproofing and
Anti-Fracture/Crack Suppression Membrane.
Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company; B 6000 Waterproof Membrane with
Glass Fabric.
Bostik, Inc.; Hydroment Blacktop 90210.
Custom Building Products; 9240 Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TILING
09 3000 - 5
e.
f.
g.
2.7
Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane.
Mer-Kote Products, Inc.; Hydro-Guard 2000.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.; S-9000.
CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE
A.
General:
Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for high
performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include
reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane:
elastomeric polymer and fabric reinforcement.
1.
Products:
equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.8
System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following, or
Boiardi Products; a QEP company; Elastiment 344 Reinforced Waterproofing and
Anti-Fracture/Crack Suppression Membrane.
Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company; B 6000 Waterproof Membrane with
Glass Fabric.
Bostik, Inc.; Hydroment Blacktop 90210.
Custom Building Products; 9240 Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane.
Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane.
MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic HPG with MAPEI Fiberglass Mesh.
Mer-Kote Products, Inc.; Hydro-Guard 2000.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.; S-9000.
SETTING MATERIALS
A.
Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following, or equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.
B.
Boiardi Products; a QEP company.
Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
Bostik, Inc.
C-Cure.
Custom Building Products.
Jamo Inc.
Laticrete International, Inc.
MAPEI Corporation.
Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.
For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging
mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TILING
09 3000 - 6
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following, or equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
2.
3.
2.9
Boiardi Products; a QEP company.
Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
Bostik, Inc.
C-Cure.
Custom Building Products.
Jamo Inc.
Laticrete International, Inc.
MAPEI Corporation.
Mer-Kote Products, Inc.
Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.
Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadienerubber liquid-latex additive at Project site.
For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging
mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or
colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.
B.
Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following, or equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
C.
Boiardi Products; a QEP company.
Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
Bostik, Inc.
C-Cure.
Custom Building Products.
Jamo Inc.
Laticrete International, Inc.
MAPEI Corporation.
Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.
Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following, or equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Boiardi Products; a QEP company.
Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
Bostik, Inc.
C-Cure.
Custom Building Products.
Jamo Inc.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TILING
09 3000 - 7
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
D.
Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following, or equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
2.
E.
Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc.
Boiardi Products; a QEP company.
Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
Bostik, Inc.
C-Cure.
Custom Building Products.
Jamo Inc.
Laticrete International, Inc.
MAPEI Corporation.
Mer-Kote Products, Inc.
Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.
Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to
temperatures of up to 140 deg F and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by
manufacturer for intended use.
Chemical-Resistant Furan Grout: ANSI A118.5, with carbon filler.
1.
2.10
Laticrete International, Inc.
MAPEI Corporation.
Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Atlas
Minerals & Chemicals, Inc., or equal.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
B.
Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or
combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications;
stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings by Schluter Systems L. P., or comparable product by one of the
following, or equal:
a.
b.
Blanke Corporation.
Ceramic Tool Company, Inc.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TILING
09 3000 - 8
C.
Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
D.
Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints and that does
not change color or appearance of grout.
1.
Products:
equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.11
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following, or
Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer.
C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978.
MAPEI Corporation; KER 004, Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout
and Tile.
Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer.
MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A.
Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
B.
Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C.
Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
1.
2.
Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by
ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with mortars or adhesives comply
with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
a.
b.
3.
Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically
scarified.
Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or
grinding.
Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TILING
09 3000 - 9
4.
B.
3.2
Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with mortars or
adhesives with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tilesetting material manufacturer.
B.
Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar
bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.
C.
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and
packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from
other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to
manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
D.
Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If needed to prevent grout from staining or
adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective
coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.3
TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods
specified in tile installation schedules.
Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series
"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation
methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting
materials used.
1.
Follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for providing 95
percent mortar coverage.
B.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight
aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so
plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize
the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within
tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same
size, align joints.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TILING
09 3000 - 10
3.
E.
Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on
floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.
Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch.
Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch.
Paver Tile: 1/4 inch.
Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.
Decorative Thin Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.
Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting
materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1.
2.
Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above
them.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint
Sealants."
G.
Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated, and where exposed edge of tile flooring meets
other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated.
H.
Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints according to grout-sealer
manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints,
remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
3.4
TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
3.5
Install cementitious backer units and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's
written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland cement mortar for
bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.
WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION
A.
Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to
produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
B.
Do not install tile or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been
tested to determine that it is watertight.
3.6
CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A.
Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written
instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
B.
Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TILING
09 3000 - 11
3.7
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
1.
2.
3.
Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation.
Use only cleaners
recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners
are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect
metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean
water before and after cleaning.
Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer
and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to
prevent drain clogging.
B.
Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to
prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of
neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.
C.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed.
D.
Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from
tile surfaces.
3.8
INSTALLATION SCHEDULE - INTERIOR FLOOR TILE ON CONCRETE SUBFLOORS
A.
Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor (TCNA F122):
1.
Thin-set mortar on waterproof membrane; TCNA F122.
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor (TCNA F125A):
1.
Thin-set mortar on crack isolation membrane; TCNA F125A.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.
Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
Tile Type: As indicated.
Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.
Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
Tile Type: As indicated.
Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor (TCNA F113):
1.
Thin-set mortar; TCNA F113.
a.
b.
Thin-Set Mortar for Cured-Bed Method: Latex- portland cement mortar.
Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TILING
09 3000 - 12
c.
d.
e.
D.
Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor (TCNA F115):
1.
Thin-set mortar; epoxy grout; TCNA F115.
a.
b.
c.
E.
Water-cleanable, tile-setting epoxy; TCNA F116.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Water-cleanable, tile-setting epoxy; epoxy grout; TCNA F131.
a.
b.
Water-cleanable, tile-setting epoxy on cured cement mortar bed installed over cleavage
membrane; epoxy grout; TCNA F132.
a.
b.
Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
Tile Type: As indicated.
Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor (TCNA F132 -Bonded Method):
1.
Water-cleanable, tile-setting epoxy on cured cement mortar bed bonded to concrete
subfloor; epoxy grout; TCNA F132.
a.
b.
I.
Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
Tile Type: As indicated.
Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor (TCNA F132 - Unbonded Method with Cleavage
Plane):
1.
H.
Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.
Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
Tile Type: As indicated.
Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor (TCNA F131):
1.
G.
Thin-Set Mortar for Cured-Bed Method: Latex- portland cement mortar.
Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
Tile Type: As indicated.
Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor (TCNA F116):
1.
F.
Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
Tile Type: As indicated.
Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
Tile Type: As indicated.
Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor (TCNA F133):
1.
Water-cleanable, tile-setting epoxy; furan grout. TCNA F133 except use water-cleanable,
tile-setting epoxy instead of chemical-resistant furan mortar for setting tile.
a.
b.
Grout: Chemical-resistant furan grout.
Tile Type: As indicated.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TILING
09 3000 - 13
3.9
INSTALLATION SCHEDULE - INTERIOR WALL TILE ON METAL STUDS OR FURRING
A.
Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring (TCNA W243):
1.
Thin-set mortar on gypsum board; TCNA W243.
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring (TCNA W244):
1.
Thin-set mortar on cementitious backer units; TCNA W244.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Thin-set mortar on coated glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board; TCNA W245.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
A.
Interior Wall Installations, Wood Studs or Furring (TCNA W243):
Thin-set mortar on gypsum board; TCNA W243.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.
Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
Tile Type: As indicated.
Interior Wall Installations, Wood Studs or Furring (TCNA W244):
1.
Thin-set mortar on cementitious backer units; TCNA W244.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.
Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
Tile Type: As indicated.
INSTALLATION SCHEDULE - INTERIOR WALL TILE ON WOOD STUDS OR FURRING
1.
B.
Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.
Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
Tile Type: As indicated.
Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring (TCNA W245):
1.
3.10
Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.
Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
Tile Type: As indicated.
Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.
Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
Tile Type: As indicated.
Interior Wall Installations, Wood Studs or Furring (TCNA W245):
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TILING
09 3000 - 14
1.
Thin-set mortar on coated glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board; TCNA W245.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.
Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
Tile Type: As indicated.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TILING
09 3000 - 15
SECTION 09 6500
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Vinyl sheet flooring.
Vinyl composition floor tile.
Vinyl composition floor planks.
Resilient base.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each type of flooring. Include flooring layouts, locations of seams, edges,
columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
C.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified in manufacturer's
standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections.
1.
For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches
long, of each color required.
D.
Welded-Seam Samples: For seamless-installation technique indicated and for each resilient
flooring product, color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6by-9-inch Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.
E.
Product Schedule: For resilient flooring and resilient base. Use same designations indicated in
"Finish Schedule" on Interior Design Plans.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance Data: For each type of resilient flooring to include in maintenance manuals.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
RESILIENT FLOORING
09 6500 - 1
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are
competent in techniques required by manufacturer for resilient flooring installation and seaming
method indicated.
1.
1.6
Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by
resilient flooring manufacturer for installation techniques required.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Store resilient flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store rolls upright.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F or more than 85 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient flooring during the following time
periods:
1.
2.
3.
48 hours before installation.
During installation.
48 hours after installation.
B.
After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C.
Close spaces to traffic during resilient flooring installation.
D.
Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after resilient flooring installation.
E.
Install resilient flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For vinyl sheet flooring, as determined by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
2.2
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
VINYL SHEET FLOORING
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Refer to the "Finish Schedule" on Drawings for products, including
styles, colors, patterns and finishes.
B.
Product Standard: ASTM F 1913.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
RESILIENT FLOORING
09 6500 - 2
C.
Thickness: 0.080 inch.
D.
Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer.
E.
Seamless-Installation Method: Heat welded.
2.3
VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Refer to the "Finish Schedule" on Drawings for products, including
styles, colors, patterns and finishes.
B.
Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 3, surface-pattern.
C.
Wearing Surface: Embossed.
D.
Thickness: 0.125 inch.
E.
Size: 12 by 12 inches.
2.4
VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR PLANKS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Refer to the "Finish Schedule" on Drawings for products, including
styles, colors, patterns and finishes.
B.
Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 3, surface-pattern.
C.
Wearing Surface: Lightly embossed.
D.
Thickness: 0.125 inch.
E.
Size: As indicated.
2.5
RESILIENT BASE
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Refer to the "Finish Schedule" on Interior Design Drawings for
products, including styles, colors, patterns and finishes.
B.
Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).
1.
Group: I (solid, homogeneous) or II (layered).
C.
Thickness: 0.125 inch.
D.
Height: As indicated.
E.
Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F.
Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
G.
Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
RESILIENT FLOORING
09 6500 - 3
2.6
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by vinyl sheet flooring
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit
vinyl sheet flooring and substrate conditions indicated.
C.
Seamless-Installation Accessories:
1.
Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand product for heat welding seams.
a.
2.
D.
Color: Match flooring.
Chemical-Bonding Compound: Manufacturer's product for chemically bonding seams.
Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
Cove Strip: 1-inch radius provided or approved by vinyl sheet flooring manufacturer.
Cap Strip: Square metal, vinyl, or rubber cap provided or approved by vinyl sheet
flooring manufacturer.
Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved by vinyl
sheet flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
B.
3.2
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of vinyl sheet flooring.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to vinyl sheet flooring manufacturer's written instructions to
ensure adhesion of vinyl sheet flooring.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
2.
3.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
vinyl sheet flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by vinyl sheet flooring
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
RESILIENT FLOORING
09 6500 - 4
4.
pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9
pH.
Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according
to vinyl sheet flooring manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent
than the following:
a.
b.
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3
lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.
Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative
humidity level.
C.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D.
Do not install vinyl sheet flooring until it is the same temperature as the space where it is to be
installed.
1.
E.
3.3
At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move flooring and installation materials into
spaces where they will be installed.
Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by vinyl
sheet flooring.
VINLY SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing vinyl sheet flooring.
B.
Unroll vinyl sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
C.
Lay out vinyl sheet flooring as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Maintain uniformity of flooring direction.
Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least
6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.
Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams.
Avoid cross seams.
D.
Scribe and cut vinyl sheet flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent
fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E.
Extend vinyl sheet flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on vinyl sheet flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent
marking device.
G.
Install vinyl sheet flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in
installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of flooring
installed on covers and adjoining flooring. Tightly adhere flooring edges to substrates that abut
covers and to cover perimeters.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
RESILIENT FLOORING
09 6500 - 5
H.
Adhere vinyl sheet flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
I.
Seamless Installation:
1.
J.
Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove vinyl sheet flooring to dimension indicated up vertical surfaces.
Support flooring at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip.
1.
3.4
Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with
welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare, weld, and
finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.
Install metal corners at inside and outside corners.
VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE AND FLOOR PLANK INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B.
Lay out floor tiles and floor planks from center marks established with principal walls,
discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as
necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half unit at perimeter.
1.
Lay in pattern indicated.
C.
Floor Planks: Randomly select and combine floor planks from several cartons. Discard broken,
cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.
D.
Floor Tiles: Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same
sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped,
or deformed tiles.
1.
Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.
E.
Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
F.
Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles
to center of door openings.
G.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking
device.
H.
Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.5
RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
RESILIENT FLOORING
09 6500 - 6
B.
Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and
other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C.
Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
D.
Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E.
Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F.
Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
G.
Job-Formed Corners:
1.
Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns
not less than 3 inches in length.
a.
2.
Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns
not less than 3 inches in length.
a.
3.6
Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.
Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1.
2.
3.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces.
Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C.
Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D.
Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
RESILIENT FLOORING
09 6500 - 7
SECTION 09 6816
SHEET CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Tufted carpet.
Carpet cushion.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following, including installation recommendations for each type of
substrate:
1.
2.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
C.
Carpet: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical
characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.
Carpet Cushion: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical
characteristics and durability.
Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet.
Carpet type, color, and dye lot.
Seam locations, types, and methods.
Type of subfloor.
Type of installation.
Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point.
Pile direction.
Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
Transition details to other flooring materials.
Type of carpet cushion.
Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label
each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation
indicated in "Finish Schedule" on Interior Design Plans and in schedules.
1.
2.
Carpet: 12-inch- square Sample.
Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SHEET CARPETING
09 6816 - 1
3.
4.
5.
D.
1.4
Carpet Cushion: 6-inch- square Sample.
Carpet Seam: 6-inch Sample.
Mitered Carpet Border Seam: 12-inch- square Sample. Show carpet pattern alignment.
Product Schedule: For carpet.
Interior Design Plans.
Use same designations indicated in "Finish Schedule" on
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1.
2.
1.5
Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet and
carpet cushion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Comply with CRI 104.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet and carpet cushion until spaces are
enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature
and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
construction period.
C.
Do not install carpet and carpet cushion over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are
sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet
manufacturer.
D.
Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet,
install carpet before installing these items.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet
installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure
of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge
raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Warranty for Carpet Cushion: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of
carpet cushion installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SHEET CARPETING
09 6816 - 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Warranty includes consequent removal and replacement of carpet and accessories.
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion due to unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
Failure includes, but is not limited to, permanent indentation or compression.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TUFTED CARPET
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in
"Finish Schedule" on Interior Design Plans.
B.
Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.
2.2
CARPET CUSHION
A.
2.3
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in
"Finish Schedule" on Interior Design Plans.
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided or recommended by carpet cushion manufacturer.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor
conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is
recommended or provided by carpet and carpet cushion manufacturer.
C.
Seam Adhesive:
Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet
manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure
seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential
defects.
B.
Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1.
Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet and
carpet cushion manufacturer.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SHEET CARPETING
09 6816 - 3
2.
3.
C.
3.2
Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet.
Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with
carpet and carpet cushion manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing
substrates.
B.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,
holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless
more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical
methods recommended in writing by carpet and carpet cushion manufacturer.
D.
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with CRI 104 and carpet and carpet cushion manufacturer's written installation
instructions for the following:
1.
2.
3.
Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down
Installation."
Double-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 10, "Double-Glue-Down
Installation."
Carpet with Attached-Cushion Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11, "AttachedCushion Installations."
B.
Comply with carpet cushion manufacturer's written recommendations.
C.
Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam
locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At
doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.
D.
Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.
E.
Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
F.
Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SHEET CARPETING
09 6816 - 4
G.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
H.
Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Patterned
Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:
1.
2.
3.
Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B.
Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations."
C.
Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer, carpet adhesive manufacturer, and carpet
cushion and adhesive manufacturers.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
SHEET CARPETING
09 6816 - 5
SECTION 09 7200
WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes textile wall covering.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on physical characteristics,
durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type. Indicate seams and
termination points.
C.
Samples for Verification: Full width by 36-inch- long section of wall covering.
1.
Sample from same print run or dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified treatments
applied. Show complete pattern repeat. Mark top and face of fabric.
D.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
E.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for wall covering.
F.
Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied
with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84:
a.
b.
2.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
Fire-Growth Contribution: Textile wall coverings tested according to NFPA 265 and
complying with test protocol and criteria in CBC.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
WALL COVERINGS
09 7200 - 1
B.
Mockups:
Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1.
2.
1.5
Build mockups for each type of wall covering on each substrate required. Comply with
requirements in ASTM F 1141.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed
and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity
conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a permanent level of lighting is provided on the
surfaces to receive wall covering.
C.
Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time
recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TEXTILE WALL COVERINGS
A.
General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from same print run or dye lot.
B.
Wall-Covering Standard: Provide mildew-resistant wall coverings that comply with ASTM F 793
for Category VI, Type III, Commercial Serviceability products.
1.
C.
Products: As indicated in "Finish Schedule" on Drawings.
Test Responses:
1.
2.
Colorfastness to Wet and Dry Crocking: Passes AATCC 8, Grade 3, minimum.
Colorfastness to Light: Passes AATCC 16, Option 1 or 3, Grade 4, minimum, at 40
hours.
D.
Applied Backing Material: Acrylic.
E.
Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Match Architect's samples.
2.2
ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant, complying with requirements in Division 09 Section "Painting"
and recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer for intended substrate.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
WALL COVERINGS
09 7200 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil,
grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers.
C.
Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking,
unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.
1.
2.
Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete
masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter.
Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer
manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.
D.
Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finish with
fine sandpaper.
E.
Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims,
and similar items.
F.
Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas
not less than 24 hours before installation.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated except where more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and
corners.
C.
Install strips in same order as cut from roll.
D.
Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible
shrinkage.
E.
Match pattern 72 inches above the finish floor.
F.
Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 6 inches from inside
corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. No horizontal seams are permitted.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
WALL COVERINGS
09 7200 - 3
G.
Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.
H.
Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure.
without any overlay or spacing between strips.
3.4
Butt seams
CLEANING
A.
Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.
B.
Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.
C.
Replace strips that cannot be cleaned.
D.
Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims,
and similar items.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
WALL COVERINGS
09 7200 - 4
SECTION 09 9100
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following:
1.
Exterior Substrates:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Interior Substrates:
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.3
Steel.
Galvanized metal.
Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
Steel.
Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
Wood.
Gypsum board.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
Label each coat of each Sample.
Label each Sample for location and application area.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated in "Finish Schedule" on Interior Design Plans and in schedules.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PAINTING
09 9100 - 1
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish
selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a.
b.
2.
1.5
Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..
Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1.
2.
1.6
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.
B.
Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide first line, premium grade architectural
products indicated in "Finish Schedule" on Interior Design Plans, or equal.
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
B.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
Colors: As indicated in "Finish Schedule" on Interior Design Plans..
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PAINTING
09 9100 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Concrete: 12 percent.
Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
Wood: 15 percent.
Plaster: 12 percent.
Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D.
Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
1.
3.2
Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and
conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be
painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
2.
B.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall
items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required
to produce paint systems indicated.
C.
Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in
writing by paint manufacturer.
D.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that
promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
E.
Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation.
F.
Wood Substrates:
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PAINTING
09 9100 - 3
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
3.3
Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood
filler. Sand smooth when dried.
Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured and dry.
APPLICATION
A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final
installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
B.
Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
E.
Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and
occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Mechanical Work:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Uninsulated metal piping.
Uninsulated plastic piping.
Pipe hangers and supports.
Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets
and outlets.
Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering
or other paintable jacket material.
Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
painting.
Electrical Work:
a.
b.
c.
Switchgear.
Panelboards.
Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
painting.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PAINTING
09 9100 - 4
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any
time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.5
3.6
Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials
being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed,
and certified in presence of Contractor.
Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with product
requirements.
Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being
used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplyingpaint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with
rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from
previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are
incompatible.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
PAINTING SCHEDULE
EXTERIOR
ARCHITECTURAL
COATINGS
Dunn
Edwards
Frazee
ICI Paints
Vista
Sherwin
Williams
First coat:
W709
266
6001
4600
A24W8300
Second coat:
W701
203
2200V
2000
A6
Third coat
----
----
----
----
A6
Substrate: Concrete,
exterior plaster, exterior
brick masonry
Sheen: F-100%
acrylic Flat
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PAINTING
09 9100 - 5
EXTERIOR
ARCHITECTURAL
COATINGS
Dunn
Edwards
Frazee
ICI Paints
Vista
Sherwin
Williams
First coat:
W305
262
4000
040
B25W25
Second coat:
W701
203
2200V
2000
A6
First coat:
W708
168
6001
4200
B51W8020
Second coat:
W701
203
2200V
2000
A6
Third coat:
W701
203
2200V
2000
A6
First coat:
W708
168
6001
4200
B51W8020
Second coat:
W901V
124
2406V
8400
A76
Third coat:
W901V
124
2406V
8400
A76
First coat:
Okon
Weather Pro
or W701W
Okon
Booster
Duckback
2100-2300
ST Stain
ICI
Woodpride
2610 Stain
Olympic S/T
Stain
A15T5
Second coat:
Okon
Weather Pro
or W701W
Okon
Booster
Duckback
2100-2300
ST Stain
ICI
Woodpride
2610 Stain
Olympic S/T
Stain
A15T5
Substrate: Concrete
masonry
Sheen: F-100%
acrylic Flat
Substrate: Wood (paint)
Sheen: F-100%
acrylic Flat
Substrate: Wood (paint)
Sheen: SGE-100%
acrylic Semi-gloss
Substrate: Wood (stain)
Sheen: STS-Semitransparent satin
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PAINTING
09 9100 - 6
EXTERIOR
ARCHITECTURAL
COATINGS
Dunn
Edwards
Frazee
ICI Paints
Vista
Sherwin
Williams
Jasco
Jasco
Jasco
Jasco
GLL Clean n
Etch
First coat:
43-4
661F774
4020 Devoe
9600
B66-310
Second coat:
W901V
124
4216 Devoe
8400
A76
Third coat:
W901V
124
4216 Devoe
8400
A76
Dunn
Edwards
Frazee
ICI Paints
Vista
Sherwin
Williams
First coat:
W401V
010
1201V
8100
B28W601
Second coat:
W401V
010
1201V
8100
B30-2600
Third coat
----
----
----
----
B30-2600
First coat:
W101
0610701
3210
1100
B28W601
Second coat:
W411V
022
1403V
1700
B20-2600
Third coat:
W411V
022
1403V
1700
B20-2600
Substrate: Metal, ferrous
and galvanized
Sheen: SGE-100%
acrylic Semi-gloss
enamel
Preparation: Etch,
galvanized only
INTERIOR
ARCHITECTURAL
COATINGS
Substrate: Gypsum board
Sheen: FW-Acrylic
Copolymer Flat
Substrate: Gypsum board
Sheen: EE-Acrylic
Copolymer Eggshell
Substrate: Gypsum board
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PAINTING
09 9100 - 7
INTERIOR
ARCHITECTURAL
COATINGS
Dunn
Edwards
Frazee
ICI Paints
Vista
Sherwin
Williams
First coat:
W101
0610701
3210
1100
B28W601
Second coat:
W450V
128
1407V
7000
B31-2600
Third coat:
W450V
128
1407V
7000
B31-2600
First coat:
W707
065
3210
4000
B28W601
Second coat:
W401V
010
1201
8100
B30-2600
Third coat:
W401V
010
1201
8100
B30-2600
First coat:
W707
065
3210
4600
B28W601
Second coat:
W411V
022
1403V
1700
B20-2600
Third coat:
W411V
022
1403V
1700
B20-2600
First coat:
W707
065
3210
4600
B28W601
Second coat:
W450V
128
1407V
7000
B31-2600
Third coat:
W450V
128
1407V
7000
B31-2600
Sheen: SGE-Acrylic
Copolymer Semi-gloss
Substrate: Plaster and
concrete
Sheen: FW-Acrylic
Copolymer Flat
Substrate: Concrete
Sheen: EE-Acrylic
Copolymer Eggshell
Substrate: Concrete
Sheen: SGE-Acrylic
Copolymer Semi-gloss
Substrate: Concrete
masonry units
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PAINTING
09 9100 - 8
INTERIOR
ARCHITECTURAL
COATINGS
Dunn
Edwards
Frazee
ICI Paints
Vista
Sherwin
Williams
First coat:
W305
262
4000
040
B25W25
Second coat:
W401V
010
1201
8100
B30-2600
Third coat:
W401V
010
1201
8100
B30-2600
First coat:
W305
262
4000
040
B25W25
Second coat:
W411V
022
1403V
1700
B20-2600
Third coat:
W411V
022
1403V
1700
B20-2600
First coat:
W305
262
4000
040
B25W25
Second coat:
W450V
128
1407V
7000
B31-2600
Third coat:
W450V
128
1407V
7000
B31-2600
First coat:
W707
168
3210
4000
B51W8020
Second coat:
W901V
124
7400
8400
A76
Third coat:
W901V
124
7400
8400
A76
Sheen: FW-Acrylic
Copolymer Flat
Substrate: Concrete
masonry units
Sheen: EE-Acrylic
Copolymer Eggshell
Substrate: Concrete
masonry units
Sheen: SGE-Acrylic
Copolymer Semi-gloss
Substrate: Wood (paint)
Sheen: SGE-100%
acrylic non-blocking
Semi-gloss
Substrate: Wood
(stain/transparent)
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PAINTING
09 9100 - 9
INTERIOR
ARCHITECTURAL
COATINGS
Dunn
Edwards
Frazee
ICI Paints
Vista
Sherwin
Williams
Stain:
V-QYB00 Stain
ZAR Stain
1700V
VWS Stain
A49
Wood filler:
Paste
Jasco
paste
Paste
Jasco
SherWood
Sanding sealer:
V-NRS-1620
NAS 1820
1916V
NAS 1820
T67FH80
First coat:
V-NRF-1626
NAF 1826
Gemini
70590
NAF 1826
T75FH109
Second coat:
V-NRF-1626
NAF 1826
Gemini
70590
NAF 1826
T75FH109
Galvaprep
GE123
Jasco Etch
Devprep 88
Jasco
GLL Clean n
Etch
First coat
(waterborne):
W715
561
4020
9600
B66-310
Second coat:
W901V
124
4216
8400
A76
Third coat:
W901V
124
4216
8400
A76
W600 Eco
Shield
Primer
066
Envirokote
primer
LM9116
6000
B28W2600
Sheen: T-Non-yellow
stain/lacquer (275
gram/liter VOC) for
field application
Substrate: Metal
Sheen: SGE-100%
acrylic non-blocking
Semi-gloss
Ferrous
preparation: SSPCSP3
Galvanized
preparation:
Substrate: Gypsum board,
plaster, concrete, wood
(Low odor, zero VOC)
First coat:
Primer
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PAINTING
09 9100 - 10
INTERIOR
ARCHITECTURAL
COATINGS
Dunn
Edwards
Frazee
ICI Paints
Vista
Sherwin
Williams
Second coat:
(flat)
W601 Eco
Shield Flat
Envirokote
018 flat
9100
6100
B30-2600
Second coat:
(eggshell)
W602 Eco
Shield Low
Sheen
Envirokote
029
eggshell
9300
6300
B20-2600
Second coat:
(semigloss)
W603
Envirokote
032
semigloss
9200
6400
B31-2600
Third coat: (flat)
W601
Envirokote
018 flat
9100
6100
B30-2600
Third coat:
(eggshell)
W602
Envirokote
029
eggshell
9300
6300
B20-2600
Third coat:
(semigloss)
W603
Envirokote
032
semigloss
9200
6400
B31-2600
First coat:
W707
168
Truglaze
4030
4000
B28W2600
Second coat:
IP755
335
4428
555 Sanitile
B73
Third coat:
IP755
335
4428
555 Sanitile
B73
Substrate: Gypsum board,
plaster, concrete
Sheen: EPX-Gloss
acrylic epoxy
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PAINTING
09 9100 - 11
SECTION 10 2800
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Private-use bathroom accessories.
Underlavatory guards.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements.
1.
1.4
Construction details and dimensions.
Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work
and substrate preparation.
Material and finish descriptions.
Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,
cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B.
Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamperand-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
10 2800 - 1
2.2
BATHROOM ACCESSORIES
A.
Manufacturers and Products, General: Refer to the Drawings for products, including styles,
colors, patterns and finishes.
1.
B.
Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Single-roll dispenser.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Mounting: Surface mounted, unless otherwise indicated.
Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch- diameter tissue rolls.
Material and Finish: As indicated.
Underlavatory Guard: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that
prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing
coverings.
1.
2.3
Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
indicated in a Schedule on Drawings.
Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors
and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage
and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
B.
Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C.
Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
10 2800 - 2
SECTION 11 4000
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
All items of portable food service equipment in Rooms 201A Warming Kitchen and 202
Storage Room and Pantry.
Electrical service plans.
Architectural Millwork details and finishes.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each item:
1.
Manufacturers’ catalog cut sheets with options and choices marked for Owners’ review.
2.
Kitchen Equipment Contractor (“KEC”) acknowledgement of Owners’ choice selections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Item K-1 Cold Food Cart – Cambro model UPC400 single compartment insulated cabinet.
- CP1220 thermal barrier insert.
- (2) CP1210 Camchiller freezer-charged gel packs for “cold keeping”.
- CD400 model-matched Camdolly.
- Owners’ choice of standard cabinet colors; KEC to submit color charts for options.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
11 4000 - 1
Item K-2 Hot Food Cart – Cambro model UPCH400/4002 single compartment heated cabinet.
- Built-in casters, one with lock.
- Electrically heated 120V 230W with 9’ cord and plug NEMA 5-15P.
- Capacity of four 4” deep 12 x 20 pans or six 2-1/2” deep 12 x 20 pans; other combinations.
- Owners’ choice of standard cabinet colors; KEC to submit color charts for options.
Item K-3 Undercounter Freezer – Beverage Air model UCF27A-9/19
- SS finish inside and out, locking door, on casters, with through-door mechanical thermometer.
- OA 27” W x 30-7/8” D x 34-1/2” H. Two interior adjustable shelves.
- Self-contained refrigeration 120V 6.0A , cord and plug NEMA 5-15P.
- For frozen food storage and to pre-charge/re-charge K-1 Cold Food Cart CP1210 gel packs.
Item K-4 Undercounter Refrigerator – Beverage Air model UCR27A-9/19
- SS finish inside and out, locking door, on casters, with through-door mechanical thermometer.
- OA 27” W x 29-1/4” D x 34-1/2” H. Two interior adjustable shelves.
- Self-contained refrigeration 120V 4.0A , cord and plug NEMA 5-15P.
Item K-5 Undercounter Dishwasher – Hobart LXePR COLD
- Undercounter, low-temperature dishwasher using injected chlorinated sanitizer, with pure cold
water rinse to removed suspended calcium and reduce warm moisture.
- Minimum hot water required is 120/F, 1.14 Gal/rack w/ cold water included, 29 racks/hour.
- Detergent, rinse aid, and sanitizer pumps are included, auto clean cycle washes down the
cavity upon shutdown. Power standard 120/60/1 power 13.4Amps; provide power cord kit.
- All manufacturer’s standard accessories, provide TWO peg and TWO combination dish racks.
- OA machine dimensions 23-15/16” W x 25-9/16” D x 32-1/2” H. Chemical containers floor
mounted on the left side facing the machine; provide grommeted 3” hole for product lines.
- Architectural Millwork provide 28” wide cavity and laminated inside end panels for moisture
resistance. OA height 32-1/2”, coordinate with Arch Millwork cabinet details and finishes.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
11 4000 - 1
Item K-6 – Hot Food Wells – Alto Shaam model 300-HW/D6
- Power 120 V 21.4 Amp CCT NEMA 15-30P provided.
- Imbed into Arch Millwork per manufacturer’s directions. Locate control bezel with NEC
approved grounded mounting enclosure.
Item K-7 – Portable Food Shield – Carlisle model 916007
- White welded aluminum frame with clear acrylic top lens.
- Standard single-sided 60” long x 12.19” D x 15” H. Lift-off removable, no fasteners, 24 Lbs.
- KEC/Manufacturer to provide a front acrylic lens down to 6” above the counter surface.
- Provide a line-tem Add or Deduct to provide the same model customized down to OA 54” long.
- Owner reserves the right to delete or defer purchase of this item.
Item K-8 – Salad Bar (in two sections) – Galley models 9640X/FH/5040-05 Budget No. 48129
- Salad Bar, NSF7 Refrigerated, 64.4”, 2-sided buffet canopy, lighted (NO FAÇADE).
- Manufacturer’s standard model features for these items. Deliver and place as indicated on the
plan end-to-end in Room B202.
- Drains 1” hose with shut-off valve leads to removable sump, for pan washdown; no floor drain
required.
- Lighted canopy with 18” glass top shelf and double, lift-up breath shield model 5045-05.
- Concealed 4” lock-in-place, non-skid casters.
- Exterior finishes added in the field after delivery By Others; NIKEC.
EXECUTION
3.1
A - KEC/GC shall review all site conditions, millwork shop drawings and familiarize themselves
with all factors that affect the delivery, installation, and connection of power supplies.
B – Deliver and install all equipment as specified, set up interiors, completely assembly all
components, and remove all packing materials.
C – Provide one year Contractor’s and Manufacturers’ Warranty full parts and labor, and
additional Five Year Warranty on complete refrigeration systems full parts and labor.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
11 4000 - 1
SECTION 12 3600
COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Stone countertops.
Simulated stone countertops.
Plastic-laminate countertops.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For countertop materials, including installation materials and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
C.
Samples for Verification: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts
for plumbing fixtures.
Show locations and details of joints.
Stone: 12 inches square.
Simulated Stone: 8 by 10 inches, including front edge and attached backsplash, in
configuration indicated.
Plastic Laminates: 8 by 10 inches, for each color, pattern, and surface finish, with one
sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to one edge.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: From sealant manufacturer indicating that
sealants will not stain or damage stone.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate stone
countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
COUNTERTOPS
12 3600 - 1
B.
1.6
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and
90 deg F and relative humidity between 17 and 50 percent during the remainder of the
construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base
cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STONE COUNTERTOPS
A.
Stone Type: Granite.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
indicated in "Finish Schedule" on Interior Design Plans.
Finish: Polished.
Match Architect's samples for color, finish and other aesthetic characteristics.
Configuration: Comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design Manual VI."
1.
2.
3.
Nominal Thickness: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than 1-1/4 inches. Gage
backs to provide units of identical thickness.
Edge Detail: Straight, slightly eased at top unless otherwise indicated.
Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field, with joints at locations
indicated and as follows:
a.
b.
4.
Grouted Joints: 1/16 inch in width.
Sealant-Filled Joints: 1/16 inch in width.
Cutouts and Holes for Undercounter Fixtures: Make cutouts for undercounter fixtures in
shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to
smooth, even curves.
a.
Provide vertical edges, slightly eased at juncture of cutout edges with top and
bottom surfaces of countertop and projecting 3/16 inch into fixture opening.
C.
Adhesives, General: Use only adhesives formulated for stone and ceramic tile and that are
recommended by their manufacturer for the application indicated.
D.
Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
COUNTERTOPS
12 3600 - 2
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following, or equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
E.
Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, chemical-resistant, water-cleanable, tile-setting
and -grouting epoxy.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following, or equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.
F.
2.
3.
2.2
Boiardi Products; a QEP company.
Bostik, Inc.
Laticrete International, Inc.
MAPEI Corporation.
Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated below that complies with
applicable requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" and will not stain the stone to which
it is applied.
1.
G.
Boiardi Products; a QEP company.
Bostik, Inc.
Laticrete International, Inc.
MAPEI Corporation.
Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral
curing, silicone.
Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, silicone; Class 25.
Color: Clear.
Stone Cleaner: Specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated, as
recommended by stone producer and, if a sealer is specified, by sealer manufacturer. Do not
use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives.
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
A.
Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix
of filled plastic resin; complying with the "Physical Characteristics of Materials" Article of
ANSI SS1.
1.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in "Finish
Schedule" on Interior Design Plans.
a.
B.
Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's samples.
Front: Straight, slightly eased at top unless otherwise indicated.
Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner unless otherwise indicated.
Thickness: As indicated.
Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers,
fabrication, and finishing.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
COUNTERTOPS
12 3600 - 3
2.3
PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements.
B.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in "Finish
Schedule" on Interior Design Plans.
a.
Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's samples.
C.
Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
D.
Core Material: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard.
E.
Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard made with exterior glue, medium-density fiberboard made
with exterior glue, or exterior-grade plywood.
F.
Core Thickness: 1-1/8 inch.
G.
Paper Backing: Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate.
H.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.
2.4
COUNTERTOP FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end
overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets. Ease edges to radius indicated.
B.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to
Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where
necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
2.5
STONE FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and
starts that could impair structural integrity or function.
1.
Repairs that are characteristic of the varieties specified are acceptable provided they do
not impair structural integrity or function and are not aesthetically unpleasing, as judged
by Architect.
B.
Grade and mark stone for final locations to produce assembled countertop units with an overall
uniform appearance.
C.
Fabricate countertops in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Comply with recommendations in NBGQA's "Specifications for Architectural Granite."
Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles.
Dress joints straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated.
Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, supports, and attachments.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
COUNTERTOPS
12 3600 - 4
5.
6.
7.
D.
Provide openings, reveals, and similar features as needed to accommodate adjacent
work.
Fabricate molded edges with machines having abrasive shaping wheels made to reverse
contour of edge profile to produce uniform shape throughout entire length of edge and
with precisely formed arris slightly eased to prevent snipping, and matched at joints
between units. Form corners of molded edges as indicated with outside corners slightly
eased unless otherwise indicated.
Finish exposed faces of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish of each
stone type required and to match approved Samples and mockups. Provide matching
finish on exposed edges of countertops, splashes, and cutouts.
Carefully examine finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for
appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates to receive countertops and conditions under which countertops will be
installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of countertops.
B.
Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of
countertops.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of inserts and similar
items to be used by countertop Installer for anchoring countertops. Furnish installers of other
work with Drawings or templates showing locations of these items.
B.
Plastic-Laminate Countertops: Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing
humidity conditions in installation areas.
C.
Before installing countertops, clean dirty or stained countertop surfaces by removing soil, stains,
and foreign materials. Clean by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching
with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials
or abrasives. Allow countertop to dry before installing.
3.3
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A.
Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 96 inches, 1/4 inch maximum.
B.
Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than one-fourth of nominal joint width.
C.
Variation in Plane at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of
adjacent units.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
COUNTERTOPS
12 3600 - 5
D.
3.4
Variation in Line of Edge at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between edges
of adjacent units, where edge line continues across joint.
INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS
A.
General: Install countertops over plywood subtops with full spread of water-cleanable epoxy
adhesive.
B.
Stone Countertops: Do not cut stone in field unless otherwise indicated. If stone countertops or
splashes require additional fabrication not specified to be performed at Project site, return to
fabrication shop for adjustment.
C.
Simulated Stone Countertops: Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Use power saws with
diamond blades to cut stone. Cut lines straight, true, and at right angles to finished surfaces
unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.
D.
Set countertops to comply with requirements indicated. Shim and adjust countertops to
locations indicated, with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned
according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. Install anchors and other
attachments indicated or necessary to secure countertops in place.
1.
Plastic-Laminate Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of
base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.
a.
b.
c.
E.
Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other
variation from a straight line.
Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c..
Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or
another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop
material manufacturer.
Space joints with 1/16-inch gap for filling with sealant. Use temporary shims to ensure uniform
spacing.
1.
Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are
properly aligned and joints are of specified width.
F.
Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to
prevent damage while cutting. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Make
cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless
beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.
G.
Grout joints to comply with ANSI A108.10. Remove temporary shims before grouting. Tool
grout uniformly and smoothly with plastic tool.
H.
Apply sealant to joints and gaps specified for filling with sealant; comply with Section 07 9200
"Joint Sealants." Remove temporary shims before applying sealant.
3.5
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean countertops as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout, mortar
and sealant smears immediately.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
COUNTERTOPS
12 3600 - 6
B.
Remove and replace countertops of the following description:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged. Countertop material may be repaired if
methods and results are approved by Architect.
Defective countertops.
Defective joints, including misaligned joints.
Countertops and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups.
Countertops not complying with other requirements indicated.
C.
Replace in a manner that results in countertops matching approved Samples and mockups,
complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
D.
Clean countertops no fewer than six days after completion of installation, using clean water and
soft rags. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with
caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage countertop material.
END OF SECTION
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
COUNTERTOPS
12 3600 - 7
SECTION 22 0400
PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
The work under this section of the specifications includes all labor, materials and equipment for a
complete and operable plumbing system, consisting of water supply, waste and vent as indicated,
hot and cold water for new and existing plumbing fixtures including all fittings, valves, trenching,
backfilling, saw cutting, sleeves, rough-in and connections to plumbing fixtures/equipment as
indicated on the drawings and unless otherwise herein specified, shall be completed, tested and
ready for use.
B.
The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following:
2.
Plumbing labor, materials and equipment and rough-in and all final connections to all
equipment and plumbing fixtures requiring such connections, whether such equipment
and fixtures are furnished under this section or under other sections of these
specifications or not indicated on the drawings or specifications, which are required for
proper operation of the systems, in accordance with the true intent and meeting of the
contract Documents, shall be provided and incorporated in the work by and at the
expense of the Contractor.
3.
All necessary trench excavation, backfilling, drilling, cutting and patching required for the
work. Repair all concrete slabs as necessary. Patching materials and finish shall match
the surrounding work.
RELATED WORK:
1.
Documents, etc.
2.
Electrical, except as noted.
3.
Automatic fire sprinkler.
4.
Section 099100 Painting, except as noted.
ON SITE VISIT:
A.
1.4
Plumbing fixtures and equipment
WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION OF THE SPECIFICATION:
A.
1.3
1.
It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to visit the project site and acquaint himself with all
existing conditions, as well as ascertain the extent of the work involved. By the act of submitting
a bid, the Contractor shall be deemed to have made such an examination, to have accepted such
conditions, and to have made allowances therefore in preparing his figure.
ORDINANCES, REGULATIONS AND CODES:
A.
The installation shall comply with all of the latest applicable ordinances, regulations and codes of
all agencies having jurisdiction.
B.
Nothing in these drawings and specifications is to be construed to permit work in violation thereof.
C.
No extras will be paid for furnishing items required by the codes, but not specified or shown on
the drawings.
D.
Rulings and interpretations of the enforcing agencies shall be considered as part of the codes.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PLUMBING
23 0400 - 1
1.5
SUBMITTALS:
1.6
A.
Within 30 calendar days after award of Contract by the Owner, the Contractor shall submit to the
Architect for his and the Mechanical Engineer’s review, six copies of lists of materials and
equipment he proposes to furnish. Each item shall be identified by the manufacturer’s name,
catalog number and size, and modifications noted. Any deviation from specifications or drawings
requirements shall be clearly delineated on the submittals, regardless of catalog literature. Any
delay in processing of submittals or progress of work due to improper or incomplete submittals
shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
B.
In the event that the Contractor installs equipment or materials in a manner not acceptable to the
Architect, without having first submitted Shop Drawings and equipment for review, any changes
which are required shall be made at the Contractor’s expense.
ALTERNATE EQUIPMENT:
1.7
A.
Prepare a Base Bid in complete accordance with these drawings and specifications.
B.
Should contractor wish to submit alternate equipment he shall list such alternate and show for
each alternate the amount of money to be deducted from, or added to, his Bid price.
C.
In all cases where substitutions are proposed, the Contractor shall bear the cost of evaluation on
the basis of standard hourly rates of engineering personnel involved.
CONFLICTS BETWEEN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
A.
1.8
In the event of conflicting requirements between items on the drawings, or between items in the
specifications, or between items on the drawings and in the specifications, the more stringent or
costly shall govern, unless decided otherwise by the Architect, who shall be the sole judge in
these matters.
CONFLICTS IN SHOP DRAWINGS OR SUBMITTALS:
1.9
A.
Contractor agrees that Shop Drawing submittals processed by the Architect do not become
Contract Documents and are not Change Orders; that the purpose of the Shop Drawing review is
to establish a reporting procedure, and is intended for the Contractor’s convenience in organizing
his work and to permit the Architect to monitor the contractor’s progress and understanding of the
design.
B.
The process of review of the Contractor’s submittals is not the purpose of testing the Architect’s
perception. If deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between Shop Drawing submittals and the
Contractor’s Documents are discovered either prior to or after the Shop Drawing submittals are
processed by the Architect, the Contractor agrees that the Contract Documents shall control and
shall be followed.
C.
It is also the responsibility of the Contractor to review the shop drawings or submittals to be
submitted prior to submittal to the Architect for his review. If shop drawings or submittals are
received without the Contractor’s review stamp, the shop drawings or submittals will be returned
to the Contractor prior to the Architects review.
PERMITS, FEES, AND INSPECTIONS:
A.
1.10
Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, fees, and inspections required by governing authorities.
EXISTING UTILITY LINES:
A.
Location and character of principal existing utilities, including dimensions as shown on the
Drawings, for convenience only, are believed complete and correct but shall be subject to
verification by the Contractor, as the Owner assumes no responsibility for their correctness.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PLUMBING
23 0400 - 2
B.
1.11
1.12
1.13
INTENT OF DRAWINGS:
A.
The drawings are essentially diagrammatic. The size and location of equipment and fixtures are
drawn to scale wherever possible.
B.
The Contract Drawings show the extent and general arrangement of the work covered under this
section.
C.
The work shall be followed as closely as possible; however, proper adjustments shall be made,
with the Architect’s concurrence, to secure maximum headroom, a neat arrangement to keep
passageways and openings clear, provide accessibility and provisions for maintenance, and meet
all Code requirements, at no additional charge.
EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING (if required):
A.
The mechanical work shall include all saw cutting, excavating, trenching, and backfilling required
for the installation of piping, anchor blocks, and any other devices that are a part of this work.
B.
Backfilling shall be performed in accordance with the applicable portions of other sections herein
before.
C.
Backfill shall not be placed until the mechanical work installed has been inspected, tested, and
approved by the special inspector concerned.
CUTTING AND PATCHING:
A.
1.14
1.15
A.
Unless otherwise specified, all equipment and materials used in the installation shall be ASME,
and IAPMO requirements. All workmanship shall be of the best quality, and none but competent
mechanics skilled in their trades shall be employed.
B.
All materials and equipment shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer.
ESCUTCHEON PLATES:
Provide polished dull chrome-plated cast brass set screw flanges where pipes pass through
walls, floors, ceilings, and partitions in exposed portions of the buildings. Escutcheon plates shall
be provided in pipes at fixture and shall be polished chrome-plated. Steel escutcheon plates are
not acceptable.
DAMAGE BY LEAKS:
A.
1.17
The Contractor shall do all drilling, cutting, and patching of the general construction work, rough,
finish, and trim, which may be required for the installation of the work. All patching shall be of the
same materials, workmanship, and finish as the original work, and shall accurately match the
surrounding work. All cutting and patching shall be done under the Architect’s supervision.
QUALITY OF EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:
A.
1.16
Adjust location or alignment of the new work as necessary to avoid or to connect to existing
utilities or piping without additional cost to the Owner.
Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to any part of the premises caused by leaks or
breaks in piping, equipment, or fixture furnished and/or installed by him, for a period of one year
from the date of acceptance of the work by the Owner.
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:
A.
Contractor shall keep an up-to-date, on the site accurate, dimensional reproducible set of record
as-built drawings, showing all work which is installed per contract drawings or differently from that
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PLUMBING
23 0400 - 3
shown on the contract drawings. As-built drawings shall include the location and the depth of
buried or concealed piping, or equipment, etc.
B.
1.18
CLOSING-IN OF UNINSPECTED WORK:
A.
1.19
1.20
1.21
1.22
Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall deliver the as-built drawings to the Architect for
final approval.
Contractor shall not allow or cause any of the work to be covered up or enclosed until it has been
inspected, tested, and approved by the Architect’s representative and local inspector. Should any
of his work be covered up or enclosed before such inspection and test, he shall, at his own
expense, uncover the work, and after it has been inspected, tested, and approved, make all
repairs with such materials as may be necessary to restore all his work and that of other trades to
its original and proper condition.
PRELIMINARY OPERATION:
A.
Should the Owner demand that any portion of the plant, apparatus, or equipment be operated for
beneficial use prior to the final completion and acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall
consent.
B.
Such operation shall be under the supervision and direction of the Contractor, but all the expense
therefore will be paid by the Owner, separate and distinct from any money paid on account of the
contract. Such preliminary operation or payment therefore shall not be construed as an
acceptance of any of the work of this Contract.
FINAL OPERATION:
A.
Upon completion of the installation of the equipment, the contractor shall place a competent man
in charge who shall operate the equipment, instructing the Owner’s operators in all details of
operation and maintenance of the equipment and controls for a period of 4 hours.
B.
Six copies of operation and maintenance manuals for each site shall be delivered to the Architect
for approval prior to final completion of the project.
STERILIZATION OF WATER PIPING:
A.
The water supply and distribution system shall be sterilized by chlorine in solution in accordance
with the American Water Works Association Publication C-601-1954 and local ordinances.
Provide additional isolation valves as required.
B.
All work and Certification of Performance shall be done by approved applicators or qualified
personnel with chemical and laboratory experience. Submit a Certificate of Sterilization.
GUARANTEES:
A.
As a condition precedent to the issuance of the final certificate for completion payment, the
Contractor shall deliver to the Architect a special written guarantee. In effect, the Contractor shall
guarantee all workmanship, equipment and materials for a period of one year from the date of
acceptance of the installation. Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to premises
caused by leaks or breaks in piping during this period. Should any other defects occur during this
period, the Contractor shall promptly repair or replace the defective items as directed by the
Architect, free of charge to the Owner.
B.
He shall warrant the complete and perfect operation of the entire system and that all apparatus
will perform in accordance with the detailed drawings and Specifications.
C.
He shall warrant that all equipment shall be supported in such a manner as to be free from
objectionable vibration and noise.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PLUMBING
23 0400 - 4
D.
1.23
He shall warrant that all licenses and royalties for use of any patented feature of the system will
be paid before acceptance of the installation. Payment of such licenses and royalties shall be a
part of the Contract.
SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS:
A.
Hangers for suspended equipment piping shall be sway braced in two directions, per Guidelines
for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Equipment” by SMACNA.
B.
All prefabricated equipment is to be designed and constructed in such a manner that all portions,
elements, subassemblies, and/or parts of said equipment and the equipment as a whole,
including its attachments, will resist a horizontal and vertical load equal to the operating weights
of those parts multiplied by the following factors in the latest Building Code being enforced during
construction.
C.
Load is to be applied at the center of gravity of the part and to be in any direction horizontally and
vertically. Anchorage, support, and/or attachment of said prefabricated equipment to the
structure shall be in accordance with “Guidelines for Seismic restraints of Mechanical Equipment”
by SMACNA.
D.
Submit shop drawings and calculations for seismic restraints and anchorage of the equipment to
the Architect and Structural Engineer for review and approval. Installation of equipment or
supporting elements shall not begin until shop drawings are approved and signed by the Architect
and Structural Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
GENERAL:
A.
All materials shall be new and in perfect condition; all materials for similar uses shall be of the
same type, material, and manufacture for ease of future maintenance.
B.
Accessibility: All equipment shall be readily accessible for maintenance and repairs. Provide all
necessary staging, scaffolding, ladders, or similar facilities necessary to install work.
C.
Exposed Trim: All trim, piping, and fittings allowed to remain exposed in finished parts of the
building shall be chromium-plated brass, or rough piping may be covered with chromium-plated
brass tubing.
D.
Protection: All materials, fixtures and equipment shall be covered or sealed upon installation so
as to be provide for safety and to insure that operation and appearance will be maintained after
subsequent construction operation.
COOPERATION WITH OTHERS:
A.
The contractor shall so organize the work that progress will harmonize with the work of all trades,
so that all work may proceed as expeditiously as possible.
B.
He shall be responsible for the correct placing of the work and the connection thereof to the work
of all related trades.
PIPING:
A.
Soil, waste and storm drain piping, underground, from points 5 feet outside building to existing
sewer or storm drain system, refer to Civil Plans and Specifications.
B.
Soil, waste, vent, and storm drain piping, underground inside of buildings and to points 5 feet
outside of building, shall be Cast Iron pipe and fittings and shall conform to the requirements of
CISPI Standard. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of Cast Iron Pipe
Institute and manufactured by AB&I, Charlotte or Tyler or receive prior approval of the engineer.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PLUMBING
23 0400 - 5
Joints for hubless pipe and fittings shall conform to the manufacturer’s installation instructions,
the CISPI Standard 310 and local code requirements. Hubless coupling gaskets shall conform to
ASTM Standard C-564. Joints for Hub and Spigot pipe shall be installed with compression
gaskets conforming to the requirements of ASTM Standard C-564 or shall be installed with lead
and oakum. Tyler SV Hub & Spigot soil pipe with TY-Seal Gasket and gasket lubricant. Service
weight, coated cast iron pipe with MG coupling is also acceptable.
2.4
2.5
C.
Soil and waste piping inside of building, above ground, shall be Cast Iron pipe with Cast Iron
fittings and shall conform to the requirements of CISPI Standard 301, ASTM A888 or ASTM A74
for all pipe and fittings. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of PVC
Pipe Institute or receive prior approval of the engineer. Joints for hubless pipe and fittings shall
conform to the manufacturer’s installation instructions, the CISPI Standard 310 and local code
requirements. Hubless coupling gaskets shall conform to ASTM Standard C-564, WW-P-401 or
No-Hub joint soil pipe No. CISPI-301-78, with stainless steel couplings per CISPI-310-78, with
Cast Iron drainage fittings. Piping 3 inches and larger shall be service weight, coated, cast iron
No-Hub joint soil pipe No. CISPI-301-78 with stainless steel couplings per CISPI-301-78.
D.
Vent piping above ground inside of the building or below ground, shall be Cast Iron pipe
No.CISPI-301-78 with stainless steel couplings No.CISPI-310-78.
E.
Domestic water piping piping above ground shall be Type L copper. Where necessary,
combination of fittings, reducers, and adapters shall be employed in making up the piping using
copper fittings. Cast fittings will not be permitted, except as specified under “Valves”.
F.
Condensate drain piping for air conditioning units to point of discharge shall be Type L Copper
fittings. Condensate piping in ceiling space below roof and in walls shall be insulated with
Owens-Corning Fiber glass 25. Pipe insulation, completely fire safe FRJ jacket with self-sealing
lap and with end joint butt strips or approved equal by Johns-Manville. Provide trap at air
conditioning unit as per detail.
PIPE CONNECTIONS:
A.
All connections between 85% red brass pipe, type “K” or type “L” copper tubing and steel pipe
shall be made with Maloney, or approved equal, dielectric unions or flanges, which will prevent
the flow of electrical current from one type of metal to another.
B.
Sleeves shall be fire rated (3-hour fire resistance) PyroPac rubber link seal sleeve series L.S. with
galvanized link seal sleeve series W.S., complete for fire rated wall or floors. Use standard link
seal sleeves and rubber link seals for non-rated wall.
VALVES:
A.
All valves shall be manufactured by Nibco, Milwaukee, ITT, Grinnell or Lunkenheimer, gate type,
unless otherwise noted. All valves of the same type shall be of the same make. Valves shall be
line size and shall be solder joint type for copper tubing.
B.
Contractor shall use ball valves for all hot and cold water shut-off valve 2” and smaller.
C.
Ball valves for copper and brass piping stainless steel 2” and smaller, two piece full port ball
valves Nibco Model T-580-S6-R-66.
D.
GATE AND GLOBE VALVES FOR STEEL PIPING: Brass bodied, 2 ½ inches and smaller. 125
WSP, 200 WOG and IBBM 3 inches and larger 125 WSP, 200 WOG.
E.
GATE AND GLOBE VALVES FOR COPPER AND BRASS PIPING: 2-1/2” and larger all bronze
or brass screwed construction, 125 WSP, 200 WOG.
F.
CHECK VALVES FOR COPPER AND BRASS PIPING: Swing check with teflon disc Y-pattern
125 WSP, 200 WOG.
G.
BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR COPPER AND BRASS PIPING: All bronze with bronze disc, 125
WSP, 200 WOG.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PLUMBING
23 0400 - 6
H.
Unions in copper piping, 2 ½ inches and smaller shall be Nibco, #733, or approved equal, 2
inches and larger shall be Nibco #740. For steel piping: Crane No. 300 AAR, galvanized
malleable iron, ground joint, brass-to-iron seat.
I.
Drop ear elbows, 90 degrees, shall be Nibco No. 707-5, copper-to-copper or Nibco No. 707-3-5,
copper to FSPS, for use at counter and wall trim connection.
J.
Balancing cocks and gas cocks at equipment shall be Crane No. 252 or Walworth No. 555 or
equal.
2.6
STRAINERS:
A.
2.7
ROOF FLASHING:
A.
2.8
Flash all vents and other piping stubbed up through roof with a waterproof flashing constructed of
18-gauge galvanized sheet metal or aluminum not less than .040 inches thick. Extend base of
flashing on the roof not less than 18 inches from the pipe. Extend flashing up the pipe not less
than 6 inches and in contact with the pipe for 1 inch at top.
PIPE ISOLATORS:
A.
2.9
All strainers shall have 20 mesh model screen, style B, with iron body for steel piping, style F,
with bronze body, for copper or brass piping as manufactured by Keckley, Hoffman, Walworth, or
approved equal.
Isolate all pipe hangers or piping supports from hot and cold water piping with Holdrite Silencer ™
Models #100, 250, 255, 261-264, Acousto-Plumb or Semco “Trisolators”, Series 100 for IPS
piping, and series 500 for tubing, or Potter-Roemer PR Isolators, Series 100 for IPS piping, and
Series 300 for tubing. Where any of the plumbing pipes except for gas pipe pass through
openings or touch any part of the structure, wrap with ¼ inch thick waterproofed felt wrap or
Holdrite Silencer Model #270 for waste, vent, and storm drain risers use Holdrite Silencer Model
276, 270.
INSULATION:
A.
All hot water supply and return piping 2” and smaller shall be insulated with (R-4) 1” of glass fiber
pipe insulation with factory applied white jacket, all hot water supply and return piping greater
than or equal to 2-1/2” shall be insulated with (R-6) 1-1/2” of glass fiber pipe insulation with
factory applied white jacket, as per Manville “Micro-Lok 850 AP” or equal by Owens-Corning.
Insulate fittings, flanges and valves with pre-molded one-piece P.V.C. molded fitting covers with
factory matched pre-cut insulation inserts as per Manville “Zeston”. Insulation shall meet the
flame spread and smoke density ratings as per Uniform Mechanical Code Section 2187 (8) for
flame spread and smoke density of not more than 25/50 fire hazard classification and shall meet
ASTM E-84, NFPA-255 and UL-730 requirements.
B.
All hot water supply and return piping insulation exposed to outdoor/weather shall be
weatherproofed with Childers Aluminum jacketing or equal. Install over the insulation specified
above. Jacketing shall be manufactured from 1100, 3105 or 5010 aluminum alloy with 3/16 inch
corrugations. Smooth or embossed jackets may be permitted in special situations to match an
existing installation. Jacketing shall be furnished with an integrally bonded moisture barrier over
entire surface in contact with insulation. The minimum thickness of aluminum jacketing shall be
0.016 inch.
C.
Condensate piping within building, in room, in ceiling space below roof, inside walls and above
ceilings shall be insulated with ½” Owens Corning Fiber Glass 25 or J-M Micro-Lock fiber glass
insulation.
D.
Exposed portions of drains, traps, and hot water pipes, stop valves and risers serving ADA
plumbing fixtures shall be covered with Truebro protective covers or protective enclosures in
compliance with CBC Section 1115B.2.1.22.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PLUMBING
23 0400 - 7
2.10
2.11
CLEANOUTS:
A.
Provide and install cleanouts where indicated on drawings and at all bends, angles, upper
terminals, and not over 100 foot intervals in any horizontal piping, as required by the local
Plumbing Code.
B.
All cleanouts shall have extra heavy cast iron body and extra heavy bronze plug. All flush with
floor cleanouts shall have adjustable watertight covers. When waterproofing membrane is used,
the cleanout body shall have integral anchoring flange and heavy clamping collar. All cleanouts
shall be as follows:
Exposed cast iron lines, above ground, wall, shall be Smith No. 4405, Josam no. Y-30,
Zurn No. Z-1305, Wade W-8550-R or approved equal.
4.
Interior finished room floors shall have nickel-bronze top, smith No. 4043, Josam No. Y670-FB, Wade No. W-7000 Series, Zurn No. ZN-1400-2, or approved equal.
Tolco, Michigan Co., or approved equal. Provide lateral bracing where hangers exceed 18 inches
long. Isolate hangers and supports from water piping with Semco Trisolators. Insulate at
openings, of structure with ½ inch felt wrap.
Provide P.P.P. (Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.) water hammer arrester at all fixture headers
with two or more fixtures or at each fixture or equipment which create surges in water supply
piping due to sudden on and off operation of valves. Size shall be as recommended by
manufacturer for the application. Install water hammer arrester as closely as possible to valve or
equipment being served.
Secure “Brady” pipe identification system at eight feet on center, classifying the material carried,
to each pipe line. All line valve shall be identified with “Brady” valve tags.
Provide and install where indicated on-drawings and adjacent to all concealed valves and
equipment requiring service. Doors shall be metal hinged, adequately sized, and fire rated to
match construction.
PRESSURE GAUGES:
A.
2.16
3.
ACCESS DOORS, BOXES AND COVERS:
A.
2.15
INTERIOR FINISHED ROOM WALLS: Cleanouts shall have bonderized prime coated
steel cover, and be Smith No. 4532 P.C., Josam No. YL-1590-B, Zurn No. Z-1320, Wade
No. W-8460-R or approved equal. Install 26-gauge galvanized sleeve from tee through
opening to finished wall surface.
PIPING IDENTIFICATION:
A.
2.14
2.
WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS:
A.
2.13
INTERIOR FINISHED ROOM FLOORS: Cleanouts to have nonskid nickel-bronze top,
and be Smith No. 4043, Josam No. 58350, Zurn No. Zn-1324, or approved equal.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A.
2.12
1.
All pressure gauges shall have 3 ½ inch dial with shut-off cock as manufactured by March.
THERMOMETERS:
A.
All thermometers shall have brass body with separable socket as manufactured by Taylor, Weiss,
Palmer or Mueller.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PLUMBING
23 0400 - 8
2.17
2.21
2.22
PLUMBING FIXTURES REQUIREMENTS:
A.
All plumbing fixtures shall be American Standards or Kohler, unless otherwise specified, each
complete with polished chrome-plated all-brass trim, unless otherwise noted.
B.
Contractor shall verify all fixture and equipment locations with the Architectural plans, and shall
furnish and connect all fixtures and equipment shown thereon.
C.
Each individual fixture supply shall be provided with chrome-plated loose key IPS stop valves.
Deliver loose keys to Owner.
D.
All wall hung fixtures shall be securely attached to a ¼ thick by 8-inch wide steel plate, which
shall extend to at least one stud beyond the first and the last fixture mounting point. Plate shall
be shop drilled with holes 1/16 inch larger than stud bolts supplied with fixture or fixture arms
specified. A jamb nut shall be set tight against face of plate to secure stud. Fixture hanger or
arm shall be supported free of finished wall by means of a second set of jamb nuts. For wood
construction, studs shall be notched and steel plate set flush with surface. Plates shall be
securely bolted to each stud crossed with 1/8 inch minimum by 2-inch steel backup plates.
Fixtures with back, specified with supporting arms, shall, in addition to the above specified plates,
have fixture hangers securely attached to a 2-inch by 8-inch wood backing.
E.
IN METAL STUD CONSTRCUTION: Attach backing plate to each stud that it crosses by 3/16”
fillet weld on top and bottom edges of the plate and across the full width of the stud flange.
FIXTURE SUPPORT CARRIERS:
A.
Water Closet – Floor Mounted: Shall be floor mounted Carrier, J.R. Smith as required.
B.
Lavatories, Wall Mounted: Shall be J.R. Smith No. 700-E supporting arms (concealed) attached
to steel plate fixture backing specified herein.
C.
Carrier approved equivalents by Zurn or Josam.
PLUMBING FIXTURE:
NOTE: NO GALVANIZED PIPE IS ALLOWED FOR WASTE AND VENT, HOT AND COLD WATER
PIPING INCLUDING TRAP, AND TRAP ARMS ETC.
A.
Water closet WC-2: Refer to plans.
B.
Lavatory L-2: Refer to plans. .
C.
Sinks S-2: Refer to plans
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
WORKMANSHIP:
A.
3.2
All workmanship shall be performed by-skilled mechanics using the best standard practices of the
trade.
GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATION:
A.
B.
C.
Thoroughly clean all piping before installation. Cap all openings during
construction.
All above ground piping shall be concealed wherever possible. Underground piping shall have a
minimum cover of 24 inches.
Provide a union on one side of all valves at equipment connections and in other locations as
required for ease of servicing of equipment.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PLUMBING
23 0400 - 9
3.3
D.
Make suitable provisions for maximum expansion and contraction of piping. Provide swing joints
and anchors as necessary.
E.
No bullhead tees, close nipples, or bushings will be allowed in piping.
F.
All connections between 85% red brass, type “K” underground or type “L” copper tubing and steel
pipe, shall be made with dielectric unions or flanges which will prevent the flow of electrical
current from one type of metal to another.
G.
Arrange piping to maintain head room and keep passageways and access openings clear and
offset as required to coincide with structural features of building. Do not spring, bend, or force
pipe into place. Use fittings for all offset or changes in alignment of piping. Except for water
piping below floor, use long sweep bends. Run piping to drain at low points, free of traps, sags,
and bends. Provide ample space between pipes for proper thickness of covering.
H.
Horizontal sanitary and drain piping shall be installed to a uniform grade of not less than ¼ inch
per foot, unless shown or directed otherwise. Vent piping shall be installed to provide proper
ventilation of the plumbing and graded to provide for its drainage. Buried sewer, waste, and drain
piping shall be continuously supported along the full length of the pipe.
I.
Openings in pipes, drains, fittings, apparatus, and equipment shall be kept covered or plugged to
prevent accumulating obstructions in the piping.
J.
Water piping shall be run free of traps, sags, and bends, and graded and valved to provide for the
complete drainage and control of the system.
K.
All threaded piping shall be made up with an approved pipe dope, applied to male thread only,
covering the entire thread.
L.
All joints in copper tubing shall be made 95-5 tin antimony and a non-corrosive flux. Both inside
and outside surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned with sandpaper or with wire brush before fittings
are assembled. Joints showing indications of defective workmanship or use of acid flux shall be
dismantled, cleaned, and resoldered. Tubing cutter shall not be used for cutting copper tubing,
hack saw blade or erosive saw shall be used.
PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION:
A.
Traps and trap arms shall be set at right angles to walls, in line with fixture outlets, without any
offsets, angles, or bends. Fixture connections shall be properly aligned to prevent any undue
strain on equipment or fixture.
B.
Each fixture shall be set level and in continues contract with floor or wall.
C.
Exposed plated, polished, or enameled connections from fixtures shall be put up with special care
showing no tool marks or threads.
D.
Trap installations, exposed above the floor, shall have chromium-plated brass escutcheon plates,
casings, and uniform code pattern traps.
E.
Trim shall be polished chromium-plated brass, by the same manufacture for each type. Where
stop valves are required in exposed piping, they shall be short stem polished chromium-plated
type. Flush valves shall all be by the same manufacture.
F.
Plumbing fixtures, equipment, faucets, and trim shall be identical in each category.
G.
All fixtures installed in floors with waterproof membranes shall be provided with approved
membrane clamps.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PLUMBING
23 0400 - 10
3.4
3.5
3.6
VENT PIPING AND FLASHINGS:
A.
Sanitary plumbing vents shall terminate 12 inches above the roof and be flashed as per
specification under Roof Flashing.
B.
Tops of flashing shall be sealed and counter-flashed.
VALVES:
A.
Valves shall be arranged and located to give complete control of all apparatus and plumbing
fixtures, and as indicated, to isolate batteries of fixtures or sections of water systems. All valves
shall be easily accessible.
B.
In no case will exposed valves be allowed in finished portions of buildings. Provide access plates
over valves in finished walls and valve boxes for valves in ground outside of building.
EXPANSION:
A.
3.7
3.8
3.9
Expansion of piping shall be provided for by swings, offsets, and anchors where required for a
satisfactory installation. Anchors shall be constructed of structural shapes of sufficient strength
for purpose intended.
ACCESS DOORS:
A.
Access openings for valves and cleanouts shall be fitted with not less than 18-gauge metal
frames, 16-gauge doors with concealed hinges, locks operated with Allen head wrench, and
anchor straps. Access doors shall be prime coated for painted wall, and polished chromium for
tile walls, Karp # 214-P-AKL, 12’ X 12”, or approved equal.
B.
Each access door shall be securely fastened into place and protected from construction damage.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A.
Piping shall be firmly held in place by adjustable split ring malleable iron hangers, supports and
pipe rests, located adjacent to fittings, at each offset or change of direction, at the ends of branch
over 5 feet long, at riser pipes, and along piping where necessary to prevent sags, bends, or
vibrations.
B.
Maximum spacing for supports of horizontal piping shall be as follows:
Steel or brass pipe:
1 ¼ - inch or large, 10 feet
Steel or brass pipe:
1 – inch, 8 feet
Steel or brass pipe:
¾ - inch, 6 feet
Copper tubing:
1 ¼ - inch, 8 feet
Copper tubing:
1 – inch or smaller, 6 feet
C.
Hanger rods shall be solid mild steel in accordance with the following schedule:
2 inches and smaller:
3/8 – inch diameter rod
2 ½ inches to 3 ¼ inches:
½ - inch diameter rod
4 inches to 5 inches:
5/8 – inch diameter rod
D.
Piping on roofs shall be supported and secured on redwood blocks anchored to roof and set in
mastic.
UNION, FLANGES, AND PIPING CONNECTIONS:
A.
Connections between copper tubing and valves, 2 inches and smaller, shall be made with brass,
copper tubing to pipe threaded adapters. Connections between copper tubing and other types of
piping having threaded openings shall be made with fitting adapters.
B.
Provide dielectric couplings or unions at points where copper tubing or piping joins steel piping, or
equipment made of a material containing iron.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PLUMBING
23 0400 - 11
3.10
C.
Unions are required on the inlet and outlet sides of all apparatus or equipment having screwed
connections, 2 inches and smaller and also on the outlet side of all screwed valves, 2 inches and
smaller, to facilitate easy removal for repair and replacement
D.
Unions are not required where valves are underground or are accessible only through hand size
access plates.
E.
Connections between copper tubing and other types of piping having threaded openings shall be
made of brass, copper, to IPS ground joint unions.
TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF PLUMBING EQUIPMENT:
A.
No piping work, fixtures, or equipment shall be concealed or covered until they have been
inspected and approved by the Mechanical Engineer who shall be notified by the contractor when
the work is ready for inspection.
B.
Should any work be enclosed or covered up before such inspection and test, the contractor shall,
at his own expense, uncover the work, and after it has been inspected, tested and approved,
make all repairs with such materials as may be necessary to restore all his work and that of other
sections to their original and proper conditions.
C.
All work shall be completely installed, tested as required by this section and the local ordinances,
and shall be leak tight before inspection is requested. All tests shall be repeated to the
satisfaction of those making the inspection.
D.
Water piping shall be flushed out, tested at 150 PSI, and shall be left under pressure of supply
main for the balance of the construction period.
E.
All flush valves, loose key stops, valves and similar equipment shall be adjusted and balanced to
provide for the proper operation of the various systems.
F.
Plumbing fixtures shall be filled with water and checked for leaks or retarded flow.
G.
Each piece of plumbing equipment and the entire plumbing system shall be adjusted and
readjusted as required to insure proper functioning, and left in first-class operating condition.
H.
After soil and waste pipe have been tested at the cleanout plugs shall be removed, heavily
flushed with graphite impregnated grease, replaced, and screwed up snugly. Nylon plugs shall
not be coated.
TEST SCHEDULE
PIPING TESTED
PSIG
TEST WITH
Water
150
Water
I.
All soil, waste, and vent piping shall be filled with water to the highest point in each system with
all air removed. The lines shall be flushed by removing the test plug. Piping may be tested in
sections, providing all portions to be concealed shall be subjected to not less than a 10-foot head.
Standpipe installed for head test shall be 1-inch minimum diameter.
J.
Sewer piping shall be filled with water to its highest point, but at not less than 5 PSIG pressure.
K.
All tests shall be maintained without leaks or pressure loss for not less than six hours, with
allowance for temperature changes, except for transit pipe.
END OF SECTION 23 0400
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
PLUMBING
23 0400 - 12
SECTION 26 0510 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Work Included: All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and
services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing,
delivery and installation of the work of this Division, complete, as shown on the drawings and/or
specified herein. The work includes, but is not limited to:
1. Examine all divisions for related work required to be included as work under this Division.
2. General provisions and requirements for electrical work. Division 1 and the General
Conditions apply to all work of this section; Division 26 supplements the applicable
requirements of other Divisions.
1.2
REFERENCE
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division
26.
B. In addition, the products covered in this Section, except as noted, shall be designed,
manufactured, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of the applicable standards of:
1. ANSI American National Standards Institute
2. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
3. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
4. NEC National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)
5. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
6. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
7. UL
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As a minimum Specification requirement, all materials and methods shall comply with applicable
governing codes and regulations.
1. Electrical equipment and materials, including their installation, shall conform as a minimum to
the following latest applicable codes and standards:
National Electrical Code (NEC)
California State Fire Marshal
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
Requirements of Serving Utility Companies
Local Codes and Ordinances
Requirements of the California Division of the State Architect (DSA)
California Administrative Code, Title 8, Chapter 4, Industrial Safety Orders
California Administrative Code, Title 24
Variances: In instances where two or more codes are at variance, the most restrictive
requirement shall apply.
B. Contractor's Expense: Obtain and pay for all required bonds, insurance, and licenses required for
the electrical work.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT
260510-1
A. General: In addition to complying with requirements of the General Provisions and applicable
sections of Division 1, comply with all Sections of this Division, and provide submittals. The
Material List and Product Data shall be submitted within 35 days of award of Contract; Shop
Drawings shall be submitted within 35 days of award of Contract.
1. Review of submittals by Owner is for general conformance with the design concept of the
Project, and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Any
action indicated is subject to the requirements of the plans and specifications. Contractors’
responsibility includes, but is not limited to: coordination of work with all trades, as well as
satisfactory performance of their work; physical dimensions which shall be correlated and
confirmed at the job site; quantities; and fabrication and construction methods.
B. Materials List and Product Data: Submit a complete list of materials proposed for the Project.
Provide product data for items as required. For each item proposed, the Material List shall
identify: item description, manufacturer's name and model/catalog numbers, with reference to
applicable specification paragraph(s). Product data shall include catalog cuts and other
descriptive literature defining type, ratings, size, and capacity.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings, packaged as associated equipment groups (for example,
all switchgear, or all lighting fixtures and controls). Prior to submitting the shop drawings for
review, the Contractor shall verify that the proposed equipment will fit in the location(s) indicated,
and that the equipment as installed will comply with all code required electrical working clearance
requirements. Submittals which are intended to be substitution items shall be specifically noted
as such or the requirements of the Contract Documents will prevail regardless of the suitability of
the proposed substitution item. Shop drawings shall include the following:
1. Catalog cut sheets for component items.
2. Installation instructions/instruction manuals.
3. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and details.
4. Schematic and wiring diagrams, including description of required operating sequences and
testing/commissioning procedures.
5. For all equipment with an installed weight of over 400 pounds, submit structural calculations
and mounting details demonstrating compliance with Title 24 of the California Code of
Regulations.
6. Certified equipment inspection/test records, and warranty certificates.
D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit six (6) sets of operating and maintenance
manuals. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1 (also see technical specification
sections following for additional requirements), include the following information for equipment
items:
1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves,
engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers and
replacement parts.
2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and
normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency
instructions; and, as required, summer and winter operating instructions.
3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting;
disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.
4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
E. Record (As-Built) Drawings: Maintain a set of full-size drawings at the job site, with all changes to
the Contract clearly and neatly recorded on the document. At the end of the Project, the notations
shall be transferred to one set of drawings and delivered to the Owner. As a minimum, the
following shall be noted:
1. Alterations in raceway routing and sizes, wire type or size, circuit designations, installation
details, single line and riser diagrams, control diagrams, schedules.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT
260510-2
2. The actual site location and elevation of all buried lines, boxes, stub-outs and other provisions
for future use shall be dimensionally referenced to building lines or other clearly established
bench marks.
1.5
PERMITS
A. Permits: All permits shall be paid by Owner.
1.6
OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Owner's Instructions: Prior to completion of the contract, and at the Owner's convenience,
instruct verbally and demonstrate to the Owner's personnel, the operation of electrical systems.
1.7
SYSTEM STARTUP
A. System Startup: Do not energize or place electrical equipment in service until all relevant parties
have been duly notified and are present or have waived their rights to be present. Where
equipment to be placed in service involves service or connection from another Contractor of the
Owner, notify the Owner in writing when the equipment will be ready. Notify the Owner's
Representative two weeks in advance of the date the various times of equipment will be
complete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Site verification of conditions: Contractor shall survey the entire project site and become
thoroughly familiar with actual existing conditions. The intent of the work is shown on the
drawings and described hereinafter. By the act of participation in the pre-bid conference and site
inspection tour, the Contractor shall be deemed to have made such a study and examination and
to accept all conditions present at the site. No request for additional payment shall be considered
as valid, due to failure to allow for conditions which may exist.
B. Electrical work shown: Electrical drawings are generally diagrammatic. Verify equipment sizes
with shop drawings and manufacturers' data and coordinate location layout with other trades.
Report immediately to the Owner any conflicts in the drawings and specifications with any code or
between the electrical work and the work of other trades. No work shall be commenced where a
conflict exists prior to receiving proper instructions. Any work or materials shown on the drawings
and not mentioned in this division, or vice-versa, shall be executed the same as if specifically
mentioned by both. Notify the Owner of any changes of location requirements prior to installation.
3.2
SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall be responsible for anchors and connections of electrical work to building
structure to prevent damage as a result of earthquake, including manufactured equipment, and
shop fabricated and field fabricated materials and equipment. All building equipment and
connections therefore shall be designed to resist seismic forces in conformance with Title 24 of
the California Administrative Code. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, and installed in
accordance with the earthquake regulations of the California Code of Regulations, Title 24,
Section 2312, and the Uniform Building Code (UBC).
B. Provide anchorage and bracing details, coordinated with component mounting provisions, which
are prepared (and signed/stamped with PE registration) by a structural or civil engineer currently
licensed in the State of California.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT
260510-3
1. Manufacturer shall provide mounting recommendations based upon approved shake table
tests used to verify the seismic design of that type of equipment.
C. Provide manufacturer's data:
1. The equipment manufacturer shall certify that equipment will function subsequent to
experiencing a seismic event, based on the vertical and lateral response spectra as specified
in Title 24 and the UBC. Seismic qualification shall be considered achieved when the
capability of the equipment provided, as described by the test response criteria, meets or
exceeds the required response criteria as specified in Title 24 and the UBC for all equipment
natural frequencies up to 35 Hz.
a. Alternatively, the certification may be based on an approved detailed structural analysis
of the equipment assembly, as specified in Title 24 and the UBC.
D. The seismic requirements are typical for each equipment item exceeding 100 pounds, including
but not limited to the following:
1. Panelboards
2. Wiring devices.
3. Lighting control devices
4. Raceway with ceiling or wall support attachments.
5. Lighting equipment.
3.3
PENETRATION SEALING
A. Seal penetrations through exterior walls and fire rated walls, floors, and ceilings. Sealing
methods used shall be in compliance with the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction to
maintain required fire ratings, and shall be in accordance with the applicable sections in Division 7
which prescribe applicable firestopping and weatherproofing of wall, floor, ceiling, and roof
penetrations. Seal all conduit penetrations through roofs.
3.4
DEMOLITION, ALTERATION AND EXTENSION WORK
A. Provide and perform demolition, alteration, extension, preparatory and miscellaneous work as
indicated.
B. Existing Conditions: Make a detailed survey of the existing conditions pertaining to the work.
Check the locations of all existing structures equipment, wiring, etc., include all demolition,
alteration and extension work in bid.
3.5
SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS AND UTILITY
A. Coordinate with the Owner any interruption of services necessary to accomplish the work.
B. Coordinate with the utility company all work associated with power and communications/signal
distribution systems and service entrance equipment.
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Tests:
1. Perform all necessary tests required to ascertain that the electrical system has been properly
installed, that the power supply to each item of equipment is correct, and that the system is
free of grounds, ground faults, and open circuits, that all motors are rotating in the proper
directions, and such other tests and adjustments as may be required for the proper
completion and operation of the electrical system.
2. Test the input and output voltage of each transformer prior to operation under load, and
adjust the output voltage by resetting taps, to achieve the specified values. After the system
has been placed under load, test transformers under normal operation. Record the
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT
260510-4
measurement of primary and secondary voltages. Reset taps to within 1/2% if necessary to
adjust secondary voltage. Submit a report indicating the final result of such tests, and
reporting specific current and voltage measurements to the Owner's Representative.
3. If, during the course of testing, it is found that system imbalance is in excess of 20%,
rearrange single pole branch circuits in lighting and receptacle panels to bring system
balance within 20% on all phases. Record all such changes on the panelboard schedule and
submit a summary of changes to the Owner's Representative.
3.7
CLEANING
A. Clean exterior surfaces of equipment and remove all dirt, cement, plaster and other debris.
Protect interior of equipment from dirt during construction and clean thoroughly before energizing.
B. Clean out cracks, corners and surfaces on equipment to be painted, remove grease and oil spots
so that paint may be applied without further preparation.
C. Locate underground conduit stubbed-out for future use, underground feeder conduits, and feeder
pull box locations, using building lines by indicating on the Project Record Drawings.
END OF SECTION 26 0510
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT
260510-5
SECTION 26 0515 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Work Included: All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and
services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing,
delivery and installation of the work of this Division, complete, as shown on the drawings and/or
specified herein. The work includes, but is not limited to:
1. Raceways.
2. Wire and Cable
3. Boxes and Fittings
4. Wiring Devices
5. Grounding and Bonding
6. Supporting Devices
7. Electrical Identification
8. Disconnect Switches
9. Panelboards
10. Overcurrent Protective Devices
11. Lighting
12. Lighting control devices
1.2
REFERENCES
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1, apply to this and the other sections of Division 26.
B. In addition, the products covered in this Section, except as noted, shall be designed,
manufactured, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of the applicable standards of:
1. ANSI American National Standards Institute
2. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
3. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
4. NEC National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)
5. NECA National Electrical Contractors Association: "Standard of Installation"
6. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
7. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
8. UL
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
1.3
SUBMITTALS (ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS)
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, and Section 26 05 10, "General Electrical Requirements."
B. Product Data: Submit product data for each type of product specified.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the following:
1. Panelboards.
2. Lighting Control Panel
3. Lighting fixtures, supports, and controls.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-1
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
Section with minimum five years documented experience.
B. Electrical Component Standard:
"National Electrical Code."
Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70,
C. NEMA and UL Compliance: Products shall comply with applicable requirements of NEMA and UL
standards. Provide products and components listed and labeled by UL.
D. NECA Installation Standards: Perform work in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
E. Source Quality Control: Quality control testing shall meet applicable Underwriters' Laboratories
Inc. Standards.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site in accordance with the General and
Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification Sections, and Section 26 05 10, "General
Electrical Requirements."
B. Store and protect product in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and in a manner to
prevent damage from the elements, personnel, equipment, and moisture.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown prior to commencing the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials, equipment, and devices shall, as a minimum, meet requirements of UL, where UL
standards are established for those items, and requirements of NFPA 70.
2.2
RACEWAYS
A. Metal Conduit and Tubing:
1. Rigid Metal Conduit: Steel, hot-dipped galvanized including the threads, with an outer coating
of zinc bichromate, complete with one coupling and one end thread protector, manufactured in
accordance with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. Fittings: threaded, hot-dipped galvanized,
manufactured in accordance with ANSI C80.4.
a. Where indicated, provide galvanized rigid steel conduit and fittings with polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) coating of nominal .020 inch (20 mil ) thickness conforming to NEMA RN-1, Type A,
Robroy Industries, or equal.
2. Intermediate Metal Conduit: Hot-dipped galvanized steel including the threads, manufactured
in accordance with UL 1242.
3. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Welded, electro-galvanized thin wall steel tubing, manufactured in
accordance with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. Maximum size: 2 inches. Fittings: compression
type (indenter or setscrew type not allowed); gland compression type, zinc plated steel body,
cadmium plated malleable iron nut, O-Z/Gedney.
4. Flexible metal Conduit:
Hot-dipped galvanized steel interlocking, single strip type
manufactured in accordance with UL1. Connectors: squeeze type, malleable iron, cadmium
plated, straight and angle connectors for all sizes and twist-in connectors for 1/2-inch and 3/4inch flexible metal conduit. Provide integral copper ground wire on sizes 1-1/4" and smaller.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-2
5. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit: Hot-dipped galvanized steel strip core with extruded liquid-tight
polyvinyl jacket. Use O-Z/Gedney Type UAG, or equal. Liquid-tight fittings. ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
Connectors: Cadmium plated malleable iron body and nut, cadmium plated steel ferrule,
insulated throat, integral cast external ground lug, O-Z/Gedney.
B. Nonmetallic Conduit and Ducts:
1. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: NEMA TC 2 and UL 651, Schedule 40. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
heavy-wall conduit, with tapered sleeve couplings, rated and labeled for use with 90C rated
conductors, manufactured in accordance with ANSI C33.91. Fittings: NEMA TC-3, cemented
type, from the same manufacturer as the conduit.
2. PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct Fittings: NEMA TC 9-1. Match to duct type and material.
3. Conduit, Tubing, and Duct Accessories: Types, sizes, and materials complying with
manufacturer’s published product information. Mate and match accessories with raceway.
C. Conduit Bodies: Provide types, shapes, and sizes as required to suit individual applications and
NEC requirements. Provide matching gasketed covers secured with corrosion resistant screws.
For metallic conduit and tubing, use metallic conduit bodies. Use bodies with threaded hubs for
threaded raceways.
D. Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters: Provide electrical wireways shall be of types, sizes, and number
of channels as indicated. Fittings and accessories including but not limited to couplings, offsets,
elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, and end caps shall match and mate with
wireway as required for complete system. Where features are not indicated, select for fulfill wiring
requirements comply with applicable provisions of NEC. Use sheet steel wireways with screw-on
covers and corrosion resistant hardware. For dry locations coat with rust inhibitor and finish with
gray baked enamel. For wet locations use hot-dipped galvanized material finished with gray baked
enamel, provide gaskets for covers.
E. Surface Raceway:
1. Provide sizes and channels as indicated. Provide fittings that match and mate with raceway.
2. Surface Metal Raceway: Construct of galvanized steel with snap-on covers, with 1/8-inch
mounting screw knockouts in base approximately 8 inches o.c. Finish with manufacturer's
standard prime coating suitable for painting. Provide raceways of types suitable for each
application required. Provided by Hoffman Engineering Co., The Wiremold Co., or approved
equal.
3. Surface Nonmetallic Raceway: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC compound
with matte texture and manufacturer's standard color. Raceway and system components shall
meet UL 94 requirements for nonflammable, self-extinguishing characteristics. Provided by
Hubbell, Inc., Panduit Corp., The Wiremold Co., Carlon, or approved equal.
F. Accessories:
1. General: Reducers, bushings, washers, etc., shall be cadmium plated malleable iron of the
shape and dimension best suited for the application.
2. Seals for Walls and Floor Penetrations: Malleable iron body, oversize sleeve, sealing ring,
pressure clamp and rings and sealing grommet, hex head cap screws, O-Z/Gedney Type FSK,
or equal.
3. Fire Seals: Heat activated intumescent material, elastomeric sealing ring, socket head cap
screws, steel pressure discs and flange, O-Z/Gedney Type CFSF, Nelson Flame Seal, or
equal.
4. End bells: Hot-dipped galvanized, threaded malleable iron, O-Z/Gedney Type THS, or equal.
5. Bushings 1-1/4" and smaller: High-impact thermo-setting phenolic, 150C, O-Z/Gedney Type
"A", or equal. Bushings 1-1/2" and larger: Hot-dipped galvanized with thermosetting phenolic
insulation, 150C, O-Z/Gedney Type "B", or equal.
6. Locknuts 1-1/2" and smaller: Zinc plated heavy stock steel, O-Z/Gedney, or equal. Locknuts
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-3
2" and larger: Cadmium plated malleable iron, O-Z/Gedney, or equal.
7. Hubs: Cadmium plated malleable iron, tapered threads, neoprene "O" ring, insulated throat,
O-Z/Gedney, or equal.
8. Expansion Fittings: Hot-dipped galvanized malleable iron with bonding jumpers. Linear:
OZ/Gedney Type AX and TX, or equal. Linear, with deflection: O-Z/Gedney Type AXDX, or
equal.
9. Escutcheons: Chrome plated sectional floor and ceiling plates, Crane No. 10, or equal.
2.3
WIRE AND CABLE
A. Provide wire and cable suitable for the temperature, conditions, and location where installed,
except as otherwise indicated.
1. Conductor: Copper. Provide solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller. Provide stranded
conductors for sizes No. 8 and larger.
a. All "apartment unit" load center feeders shall be aluminum "SER" cable as permitted by
code.
b. All interior "apartment unit" wiring shall be non-metallic cable (NMC) as permitted by code.
c. Use stranded conductors at motors and other applications where subject to vibration, and
for control circuits.
2. Minimum Size Conductor: No. 12 AWG, except as otherwise indicated.
a. Non-metallic cable (NMC): No. 14 AWG.
1. Apartment unit kitchen appliance circuits: No. 12 AWG.
b. Control circuits: No. 14 AWG.
3. Insulation voltage rating: 600 volts.
B. Building wire and cable: Single conductor insulated wire, with THHN/THWN insulation.
1. All interior “apartment unit” wiring shall be non-metallic (NMC) as permitted by code.
C. Connectors: Provide UL Listed factory fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ampacity
ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Use connectors
with temperature ratings equal to or greater than those of the wires upon which used.
D. Pull Cord: 1/8" polypropylene or nylon.
2.4
BOXES AND FITTINGS
A. Provide indicated types, sizes, and NEMA enclosure classes. Where not indicated, provide units
of types, sizes, and classes appropriate for the use and location. Provide all items complete with
covers and accessories required for the intended use. Provide gaskets for units in damp or wet
locations.
1. Materials and Finishes:
a. All backboxes and fittings, installed for use with non-metallic cables, shall be plastic.
b. Sheet steel: Flat rolled, code gauge, galvanized steel.
c. Fasteners for general use: Corrosion resistant screws and hardware, including cadmium
and zinc plated items.
d. Fasteners for wet or damp locations: Stainless steel screws and hardware.
e. Cast metal for boxes, enclosures and covers: Copper-free aluminum except as otherwise
indicated.
f. Exterior finish: Gray-baked enamel for items exposed in finished locations except as
otherwise indicated.
g. Painted interior finish: Where indicated, white baked enamel.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-4
h. Fittings for boxes, cabinets, and enclosures: Conform to UL 514B. Malleable iron or zincplated steel for conduit hubs, bushings and box connectors.
B. Metal outlet, device, and small wiring boxes:
1. General: Conform to UL 514A and UL 514B. Boxes shall be of type, shape, size, and depth
to suit each location and application.
2. Steel Boxes: NEMA OS 1. Boxes shall be sheet steel with stamped knockouts, threaded
screw holes and accessories suitable for each location including mounting brackets and
straps, cable clamps, exterior rings and fixture studs.
3. Cast Aluminum Boxes: Copper-free aluminum with gasketed covers, threaded raceway
entries, and features and accessories suitable for each location including mounting ears,
threaded screw holes for devices and closure plugs.
C. Pull and junction boxes:
1. General: Conform to UL 50, for boxes over 100 cubic inches in volume. Boxes shall have
bolted-on covers of material same as box, and shall be of the size and shape to suit the
application.
2. Steel Boxes: Sheet steel with welded seams. Where necessary to provide a rigid assembly,
construct with internal structural steel bracing.
3. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Boxes: Sheet steel with welded seams. Where necessary to
provide a rigid assembly, construct with internal structural steel bracing. Hot-dip galvanize
after fabrication. Cover shall be gasketed.
2.5
WIRING DEVICES
A. General: Provide wiring devices, in types, characteristics, grades, colors, and electrical ratings for
applications indicated which are UL listed and which comply with NEMA WD 1 and other
applicable UL and NEMA standards. Coordinate color selection, prior to ordering materials, with
Architect/Engineer.
B. Receptacles: UL 498 and NEMA WD 6. Straight blade, two-pole, three-wire grounding type,
specification grade. All "apartment unit" receptacles to be standard residential 15 amp rated
grounding type duplex receptacles. If an individual receptacle is installed on a 20 amp dedicated
circuit - the receptacle shall be rated 20 amps.
C. Switches: UL 20 and NEMA WD 1. Quiet toggle-type AC switch. Ratings and types, standard
(residential) grade.
D. Wall Plates: Single and combination, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as indicated.
Provide plates which mate and match with wiring devices to which they are attached, and are from
the same manufacturer. Provide metal screws for securing plates to devices with screw heads
colored to match finish of plates. Provide wall plate color to match wiring devices except as
otherwise indicated. Provide wall plates with engraved legend where indicated. Conform to
requirements for electrical identification. All "apartment unit" device plates to be plastic standard
(residential) grade unless otherwise noted.
1. Interior Areas: Smooth, high-impact resistant plastic, of the same manufacturer as the device.
a. Voice, data, or video communications system outlets: Same as for wiring devices except
with 3/8 inch or 1 inch rubber grommets as required.
b. Surface mounted outlet boxes: Zinc coated sheet steel rounded edges, same size as
outlet box.
2. Exterior areas: Weatherproof, corrosion-resistant type, die cast aluminum with self-closing
gasketed cover. For duplex receptacles, use Hubbell 5206-WO or equal; for wall switches,
use Hubbell 7420 or equal; for GFI receptacles, use manufacturer’s listed plate.
2.6
GROUNDING AND BONDING
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-5
A. Materials: All materials shall be copper. Provide types indicated and sizes and ratings required to
comply with NEC. Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of NEC
requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size, rating, and quantity
indications govern.
B. Wire and cable conductors shall be as follows, except as otherwise indicated:
1. Equipment grounding conductor: green insulated copper.
2. Grounding electrode conductor: stranded copper cable.
3. Bare copper conductors: Shall conform to the following:
a. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
b. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
c. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
C. Connector products:
1. General: Listed and labeled as grounding connectors for the materials used.
2. Pressure Connectors: High-conductivity plated units.
3. Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty units listed for the application.
4. Exothermic Welded Connections: Provided in kit form and selected for the specific types,
sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items to be connected.
D. Grounding electrodes:
1. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel with high-strength steel core and electrolytic-grade copper
outer sheath, molten-welded to core. Size: 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length.
2. Plate Electrodes: Copper plates, minimum 0.10 inch thick, size as indicated.
E. Test (ground) wells: precast concrete, 12" round x 18" deep open bottom valve box, with cast iron
grate cover plate marked "GROUND".
2.7
SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Supports: Individual conduits shall be rigidly supported and clamped with one hole malleable iron
conduit clamps, conduit beam clamps, conduit hangers, or wall brackets, as necessary for the type
of construction and as indicated. The use of perforated flat steel straps or wire for supporting
conduits will not be permitted.
B. Support Attachments: Kwik-bolt, sleeve anchors, wedge anchors, toggle bolts, and hollow all
anchors, as manufactured by Hilti or Red Head.
C. Light Steel Framing: Light steel framing members for conduit hangers and other supports shall be
formed from 12 gauge (minimum) steel, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel for light steel framing members and fittings and all
hardware, such as hanger rods, couplings, bolts, nuts, etc., shall be electro-galvanized, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: B-Line, Superstrut, Unistrut, or equal.
2.8
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A. Manufacturers: Brady, Ideal Industries, Markal, Panduit, Thomas & Betts.
B. Electrical identification products:
1. Adhesive Marking Labels for Raceway and Metal-clad Cable: Pre-printed, flexible, selfadhesive labels with legend indicating voltage and service as required by NEC and industry
standards for residential construction.
2. Label Size, as follows:
a. Raceways 1-Inch and Smaller: 1-1/8 inches high by 4 inches long.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-6
b. Raceways Larger than 1-Inch: 1-1/8 inches high by 8 inches long.
3. Color: Black legend on orange background.
4. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape
not less than 3 mils thick by 1 inch to 2 inches in width.
5. Pretensioned Flexible Wraparound Colored Plastic Sleeves for Raceway and Cable
Identification: Flexible acrylic bands sized to suit the raceway diameter and arranged to stay
in place by pre- tensioned gripping action when coiled around the raceway or cable.
6. Underground Line Marking Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous printed, plastic tape
compounded for direct burial service not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. Printed
legend indicative of general type of underground line below.
7. Wire/Cable Designation Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound,
cable/conductor markers with preprinted numbers and letters.
8. Aluminum, Wraparound, Cable Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014- inch thick, aluminum
sheet, fitted with slots or ears for securing permanently around wire or cable jacket or around
groups of conductors. Provide for legend application with stamped letters or numbers.
9. Plasticized Card Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field printed legends to suit the
application. Orange background, except as otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener.
10. Aluminum-Faced Card Stock Tags: Weather-resistant, 18-point minimum card stock faced on
both sides with embossable aluminum sheet, 0.002 inches thick, and laminated with moistureresistant acrylic adhesive. Pre-print legend to suit the application, and punch for tie fastener.
11. Brass or Aluminum Tags: Metal tags with tamped legend, punched for fastener. Dimensions:
2 inches by 2 inches by 19 gauge.
12. Engraved, plastic-laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine
plastic laminate, 1/16-inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches, or 8 inches in
length; 1/8-inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in white letter on black face and
punched for mechanical fasteners.
13. Warning and caution signs for indoor use: Shall be minimum 18 gauge steel, white porcelain
enamel finish, with red lettering, punched for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size
appropriate to the location. Lettering to read, "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE," and/or
“POTENTIAL ARC FLASH HAZARD, Appropriate PPE and Tools Required When working on
this Equipment”, unless otherwise indicated or as recommended by Manufacturer.
14. Exterior Metal-Backed Butyrate Warning and Caution Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading,
preprinted cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 20-gauge, galvanized steel backing, with
colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location. Provide 1/4-inch grommets in corners for
mounting.
15. Fasteners for Plastic-Laminated and Metal Signs: Self-tapping stainless steel screws or
number 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat lock washers.
16. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking nylon cable ties, 0.18-inch
minimum width, 50-lb minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from
minus 50F to 350F. Provide ties in specified colors when used for color coding.
2.9. SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
1.
Product by Amber/Booth Company, Inc.; California Dynamics Corporation; Cooper B-Line,
Inc.; Hilti Inc.; TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC. or Unistrut; Tyco International,
Ltd. Having Powder coating on springs and housings. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hotdip galvanize metal components for exterior use. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal
components on isolators for interior use. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and
seismic-control devices to indicate capacity range.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-7
2.
Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of
components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be
subjected.
3.
Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for
attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and
other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension,
compression, and torsion forces.
4.
ASTM A 603 galvanized steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with
thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a
minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
5.
Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods.
6.
Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of
anchors and studs.
7.
Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and
size of attachment devices.
8.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings:
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
9.
Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications
and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength required for anchor
and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.
One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
10. Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based
resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts
and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior
applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to
ASTM E 488.
2.10
DISCONNECT (SAFETY) SWITCHES
A. Disconnect switches shall be rated 600 volts A.C., NEMA Type HD heavy duty, horsepower-rated,
quick-make/quick-break, non-fusible or fusible, Class “R”, with the number of poles and ampere
rating as shown. Enclosure shall be NEMA Type 1, lockable. Maximum voltage, current and
horsepower rating shall be clearly marked on the switch enclosure. Switches equipped with dualelement time-delay fuses shall be permanently labeled with fuse type and rating.
1. For outdoor locations, or shown as “WP” (weatherproof), the enclosure shall be NEMA Type
3R, unless otherwise indicated.
2.11
PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Cutler-Hammer, Siemens, General Electric, or Square D.
B. Materials:
1. Load centers:
a. The load center and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in
accordance with the latest applicable standards of UL, NEMA and NEC including: UL 67 Panelboards, UL 50 - Cabinets and Boxes, UL 489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers, and
Federal Specification W-C 375B - Circuit Breakers.
b. Manufacturers: Cutler-Hammer Type BR, or approved equal.
1. Load centers in units to be primed and painted out with wall color.
c. Ratings:
1. Load centers shall be rated for 240 Vac and shall have short circuit ratings as shown
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-8
on the drawings or as herein scheduled, but not less than 10,000 amperes RMS
symmetrical.
2. Breakers shall be minimum of 125 ampere frame. Breakers 15 through 125 amperes
trip size shall take up the same pole spacing.
3. Load centers shall be labeled with a UL short circuit rating. When series combination
ratings are applied with integral or remote upstream devices, a label shall be provided.
Series combination ratings shall cover all trip ratings of installed frames. It shall state
the conditions of the UL series ratings including: Size and type of upstream device,
branch devices that can be used, and UL series short circuit rating.
d. Construction:
1. All interiors, with the exception of the branch circuit breakers shall be completely
factory assembled with main breakers, main lugs, or no main device.
2. Interiors shall be so designed that circuit breakers can be replaced without disturbing
adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors and shall be so
designed that circuits may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping.
3. Physical means shall be provided to prevent the installation of more overcurrent
devices than that number for which the enclosure was designed. Half-size breakers
shall have a UL listed rejection tab over the line terminals. Load center interiors must
have notched stabs to accept these rejection tab class CTL breakers, if required and
approved.
e. Bus:
1. Bus bars for the main and cross connectors shall be of tin-plated aluminum in
accordance with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. standards. Bussing shall be braced
throughout to conform to industry standard practice governing short-circuit stresses in
load centers.
2. Neutral bussing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral
connection of same ampacity as branch.
f. Wiring/Termination:
1. All wire connectors and terminals shall be of the anti-turn solderless type and suitable
for copper or aluminum wire of the sizes indicated. All connectors must meet the
“Requirements for Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs” as stated in UL486B.
2. All load centers where marked shall be suitable for use with 60/75°C rated wire.
g. Circuit Breakers:
1. Circuit breakers shall be molded case type. Circuit breakers shall have four-rivet
construction (GFI type five-rivet). Multi-pole circuit breakers shall be of a stack pole
design to provide electrical phase isolation.
2. Each pole of the circuit breaker will provide inverse time delay overload and
instantaneous short circuit protection by means of both thermal and magnetic sensors.
3. The circuit breaker calibration shall not be affected by environmental changes in
relative humidity. The thermal bimetal element shall be welded to the steel frame and
calibration shall be set independent of the molded case, by computer controlled
equipment.
4. All circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and multi-pole circuit
breakers shall have an internal common trip mechanism. The circuit breakers shall
incorporate trip mechanisms that are mechanically tripfree from the handle. The
handle position shall provide good visual trip indication.
5. Contacts shall be of non-welding silver alloy.
6. All circuit breakers shall have the trip rating inscribed on the handle on each circuit
breaker pole. Also, unique color-coded cases that indicate the UL listed 10 kA or 22
kA interrupting ratings. Breakers shall be able to be used as a main or branch
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-9
disconnect devices.
7. Branch circuit breakers may also be used in the 1/2-inch per pole ratings that include
2-pole 1-inch wide modules and 4-pole 2-inch wide modules. 2-pole circuit breakers
must incorporate a common trip mechanism. The exclusive CTL rejection tab feature
shall be provided to limit the number of branch devices for a load center to 42, in
compliance with NEMA Article 384-15.
8. Circuit breakers shall be completely enclosed in a molded case of thermoset material.
No internal aluminum parts shall be used. All internal ferrous parts shall be plated to
prevent corrosion.
9. All terminals shall be listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors. Terminals
shall be of the box lug or clamp type design. The terminals shall meet UL 486B
requirements and shall be suitable for use with either 60°C or 75°C wire.
10. The calibrated bimetal assembly shall be mechanically isolated form the load terminal
using a flexible braided copper shunt wire, such that movement of the terminals due to
twisting and overtorquing does not affect breaker calibration.
11. Breakers shall be SWD rated and/ or HACR rated as required.
12. Arc Fault Circuit Interrupting (AFCI) circuit breakers shall be provided on all 15 and 20
ampere single-phase 120/208 Vac circuits except those indicated as remote controlled
breakers. AFCI breakers shall be “Classified for mitigating the effects of arcing faults,”
or conforming to UL Standard 1699 and as defined by Article 210-12 Section A of the
2005 NEC Code.
h. Surge Protection Devices: All 120/208 Vac single-phase load centers shall have surge
protection.
1. The surge protection device shall be capable of plugging onto a maximum of two
adjacent spaces in single-phase load center. The device shall provide, as a minimum,
up to 10 kA surge current protection per phase for transients on the incoming ac line.
2. Surge protection devices must be equipped with LEDs to indicate proper functioning of
the internal electronics.
i. Enclosures:
1. Load centers shall have NEMA 1 general purpose or NEMA 3R rainproof enclosures
as indicated on the drawings and shall be surface or flush mounted except where
noted.
2. Boxes shall be made from galvanized sheet steel having multiple knockouts.
Rainproof boxes shall use galvanized steel or an approved coating system which
meets or exceeds standards for outdoor NEMA Type 3R enclosures. Boxes shall be
of sufficient size to provide a minimum code gutter space on all sides.
3. The cover shall have an easy adjustment feature for flush applications.
4. Boxes shall be factory assembled into a single rigid structure.
5. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, hinged doors covering all circuit breaker handles
shall be included in all trims. Trim doors shall not uncover any live parts in making the
circuit breaker handles accessible. If key locks are required, all locks shall be keyed
alike.
6. Combination trims for flush and surface panels shall be flat and shall overlap the box
by at least 5/8-inch (15.9 mm) all around. Trims shall be mounted by a screwdriver
without the need for special tools.
7. Trims shall be bonderized and finished with a medium light gray ASA 61 enamel. The
finish paint shall be of a type to which field applied paint will adhere.
j. The standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this
section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of UL and NEMA.
2. Branch circuit panelboards:
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
10
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-
a. Provide factory assembled, enclosed panelboards in dead front cabinets, with doors,
surfaced mounted or recessed as indicated, not less than 20" wide and 5-3/4" deep.
Height will depend on the number of breakers and spaces.
b. Where a control compartment is indicated, provide an integral compartment with a
separate hinged lockable door held with captive screws.
c. Provide feeder terminal lugs for both main lugs only and main breakers rated for use with
copper or aluminum conductors.
d. Provide three phase, 4 wire, solid neutral design with sequence bussing, full capacity
neutral and full length copper bussing including areas indicated as space only. Bussing
shall be braced for maximum available fault.
e. Provide copper neutral bus where neutral bus is indicated. Neutral bus shall be sized for
minimum twice the current carrying capacity of line bus.
f. Key all door locks alike. Provide a type written directory of circuit index card holder
mounted behind the door in framed card slot with plastic see through window.
g. Provide full size copper equipment ground bus.
h. All breakers shall be bolt-on type molded case. No tie handle is accepted for multi-pole
breaker.
i. Provide pad lock off devices on all breakers serving appliances, motor operated
equipment, HVAC equipment and other circuit as indicated on panel schedules.
j. 120/208V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire Panelboards: General Electric Co. type NLAB, Square D Co.
type NQOB, or Cutler-Hammer type POW-R-LINE1.
k. 277/480V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire Panelboards: General Electric Co. type NHB, Square D Co.
type NEHB, ITE, Inc. type NHB, Sylvania Co. type NH1B or Cutler-Hammer type POW-RLINE2.
l. All equipment shall be listed to meet or exceed the available fault current indicated on
drawings.
m. Provide main lugs only unless scheduled otherwise.
n. Construct in accordance with U.L. and NEMA Standards.
3. Distribution Panelboards:
a. Provide circuit breaker type distribution panelboards with fully rated copper bus, lockable
molded case breakers for mains and feeders. Provide nameplates for all circuit breakers.
b. Busing shall be braced to withstand maximum available fault current indicated on
drawings.
c. Provide copper neutral bus where indicated. Neutral bus shall be sized for minimum twice
the current carrying capacity of line bus.
d. Provide full size copper ground bus adequate for number of grounded circuits.
e. General Electric Co. type NCP and type CCB, or Square D Co. types HCN and HCM, or
Cutler-Hammer type POW-R-LINE3 and POW-R-LINE4B.
4. Circuit breakers:
a. Resettable, quick-make, quick-break, bolt-in place type, trip-free, with separate trip
position from on and off positions.
b. Multiple pole breakers with common trip and one operation handle.
c. Do not provide handle ties.
d. Wire with sequence phasing.
e. Circuit breakers shall be rated to meet or exceed the available fault current indicated on
drawings.
2.12
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
11
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-
A. Manufacturers:
1. Circuit Breakers:
a. General Electric
b. Siemens
c. Square D
d. Cutler-Hammer
2. Fuses: Bussmann only.
B. Materials and fabrication:
1. Circuit Breakers: Molded case, quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip-free with
individual inverse time tripping mechanism on each pole. Terminal lugs rated for copper and
aluminum conductors. Minimum 10,000 amperes interrupting capacity, RMS symmetrical
short circuit rating shall be as required. All breakers shall meet or exceed the maximum
available fault current as indicated on single line diagram.
a. Use magnetic-only circuit breakers for motor applications.
b. Provide Class A (5ma sensitivity) breakers where GFI type breakers are required.
c. Provide "HACR" type circuit breakers for HVAC loads. Ratings shall be as indicated on
the drawings.
d. No tie handle on multi-pole circuit breaker is accepted.
e. Provide ambient compensated type breaker where the breaker is installed in the ambient
in excess of 40C (104F).
2. Fuses, as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Class RK1:
1. 250V; LPN-RK, Lowpeak
2. 600V; LPS-RK
b. Class L: KRP-C, Hi-Cap
2.13
LIGHTING
A. Manufacturers: As indicated herein, and as shown on the Lighting Fixture Schedule.
B. Lighting Fixtures, General:
1. Work covered includes manufacturing, equipping, wiring, and assembling of all lighting
fixtures. Provide lighting fixtures complete for each and every light outlet in the type, quality,
and size of fixture indicated in lighting fixture schedule.
2. The lighting fixtures shown on fixture schedule are marked with the corresponding type letter,
indicating thereby the particular type of fixture to be installed on the respective outlets.
3. Include a lighting fixture on every light outlet shown, unless otherwise indicated to be omitted.
If the type of lighting fixture is not specifically noted, provide without extra cost to the Owner, a
lighting fixture of the same type called for under a similar condition elsewhere on the Contract
Drawings.
4. Catalog number on the lighting fixture schedule are for the purpose of indicating the general
type, quality, and size of fixtures that will be required. The use of Catalog Numbers for a
lighting fixture does not necessarily include all accessories that may be required for a
complete and operational installation.
5. All luminaries and other lighting equipment delivered to the job complete, wired and including
all supporting means, such as plaster frames, supports, hangers, canopies, sockets, holds, all
current or voltage modifiers, such as ballasts, starters, all light control materials; specifically
diffusers, louvers, lenses, reflectors and refractors.
6. All lighting fixtures constructed and installed in accordance with local building codes and
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
12
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-
directives by the NFPA and shall bear the label of approval of the U.L. All materials new and
of best grade of approved manufacturing standards. Workmanship of highest order to assure
trouble-free operation and durability of equipment. Lighting fixtures constructed by labor
agreeable with that employed on the project.
7. Lighting fixtures to be designed for highest relative efficiency and service. Maintenance to be
simple and re-lamping possible without use of special tools.
8. Provide all light-sources, lamps and other light-producing media called for and suitable for
specified equipment and functions.
C. Fluorescent lighting fixtures:
1. Fluorescent luminaries to use not less than No. 16 gauge SF-2 wire. No splice or tap located
within a fixture arm, stem or chain. Wire continuous from lamp socket, or from internally
mounted ballast, to splice with building wire whether splice box is mounted on fixture or
attached to building.
2. Fluorescent lampholders, white plaster, designed for spring loaded contacts or Bi-Pin contacts,
as required, for specified lamp requirements.
3. Fluorescent lighting fixture body parts, comprising the lighting fixture housing, reflectors, wire
channels, end plates, ballast housing, and similar body parts, to be made of extruded
aluminum, galvanized stampings, or bonderized steel, as indicated in the lighting fixture
schedule. Wire-ways to have adequate wiring space, accessible after fixture installation.
Housing adequately ventilated where required. All screws and nuts have rust-proof finish.
4. All fluorescent lighting fixtures supplied with ballasts wired for the branch circuit wiring.
5. Where recessed fluorescent lighting fixtures are installed in ceiling finished with acoustical tile
or grid system, the lighting fixture shall conform to the patterns indicated on the Architectural
Reflected Ceiling Plan.
6. The final installation must present a symmetrical appearance, with all lighting fixtures free of
any damage and thoroughly clean.
7. Provide all additional means necessary to support lighting fixtures that would put excessive
stress on the ceiling system.
8. Lighting fixtures mounted end-to-end and used as a raceway to be mechanically bonded
together to insure continuity of ground. Lighting fixtures used as "feed through" to have
wireways of adequate size.
9. All plastic lens of shielding for fluorescent lighting fixtures to be made from 100% virgin acrylic
unless otherwise specified.
10. Temperature around ballast and in fixture housing shall not exceed 90C with ambient room
temperature at 27C.
11. Fluorescent lighting fixtures exposed to outside temperatures supplied with 0F ballasts.
D. Additional Fixture Related Requirements:
1. Recessed lighting fixtures in plaster or drywall ceilings to be furnished with plaster frames.
2. Lighting fixtures recessed in furred ceiling installed so that they can be removed from below
the ceiling without damage to the ceiling.
3. Recessed lighting fixtures to be installed with metal bar hangers for attaching to ceiling
supports. Lighting fixtures not supported directly from ceiling, provide galvanized steel wire as
required for supporting lighting fixture from structure. No wood or other combustible material
to be used for supporting fixtures.
4. Provide stems with swivel joints and canopies for all suspended lighting fixtures. Finish of all
exposed parts to match that of the associated fixture, unless otherwise noted. Design to
conform to Drawings. Wiring to pendant fixtures contained within stems. Wire entry by means
of heavy malleable iron hickeys.
5. A canopy to be furnished for each stem and all canopies to match for each fixture type, as
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
13
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-
shown.
6. Ascertain type of ceiling construction for each fixture and provide suitable frames and fixture
accessories to suit. Furnish substantial mounting frames or plaster rings for all recessed and
semi-recessed lighting fixtures indicated or required. All frames made of galvanized steel with
extra cross members where required to insure maintenance or proper opening dimensions
during installation.
E. Lamps: Provide energy saving lamps for all fixtures as manufactured by Osram-Sylvania, Phillips
or General Electric, unless otherwise shown.
F. Ballasts:
1. Electronic ballasts shall be Magnetek "Triad" series, Osram Sylvania "Quicktronic," or equal by
Advance. Electronic ballasts shall be high-frequency, full-output, U.L. listed and ETL certified,
class "P" high power factor, with an "A" sound rating or better. All electronic ballasts shall
have less than 20% total harmonic distortion, shall have a maximum lamp current crest factor
of 1.7, and shall be warranted for parts and replacement labor for one full year from the date of
installation. Ballasts for 1-, 2-, 3-, or 4- lamp combinations shall be used as specified in the
lighting fixture schedule.
a. Electronic dimming ballasts shall have a dimming range from 100% to 1%, unless
otherwise indicated for T-12 and T-8 lamps, 100% to 5% for T-5 and T-4 lamps, and shall
be approved for application by the dimming system manufacturer. Electronic dimming
ballasts shall internally limit inrush current and preheat lamp cathodes before applying arc
voltage to ensure rated lamp life is not diminished. Electronic dimming ballasts shall
withstand 4000 volt surges as specified in ANSI C62.41. Electronic dimming ballasts shall
be available in 1-, 2-, or 3- lamp combinations as specified in lighting fixture schedule.
Lead length from electronic dimming ballast to lamp socket shall not exceed seven feet for
T-8 or three feet for T-5 lamps. Lamps operated by electronic dimming ballast shall be
burned in at 100% light for 100 hours before being dimmed. Electronic dimming ballasts
shall be Lutron Hi-Lume FDB series, or equal.
2. Magnetic fluorescent ballast shall be energy saving type, Magnetek or Advance.
3. Ballast for fixtures installed outdoors, shall be exterior type for 0F starting.
4. Ballast for H.I.D. fixtures shall be high power factor type (minimum 0.9). Starting amount shall
not exceed operating current.
5. Rapid-start fluorescent fixtures shall be furnished with ETL and U.L. approved high power
factor "P" rated ballasts complete with automatic reset thermal protection. All ballasts shall be
acoustically rated "A".
6. Temperature rise of the ballasts in fixtures not to exceed 45C on test and mounted in the
fixture housing and secured in place by means of bolts, screws, lock washers and nuts.
7. Ballasts for magnetic fluorescent lamps shall be one or two lamp type only. Where one lamp
fixtures are used in continuous rows, two lamp ballasts utilized except where odd lamps occur
at end of rows. Ballasts have a power factor of 90% or higher and operate at not higher than
120% of rated current nor rated line voltage. All ballasts carry a 2-year guarantee for material
and labor on replacement. Guarantee period starts after Architect's acceptance in writing of
lighting installations.
8. All ballasts shall have power factor not less than 0.9.
G. Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard mounting rings, trim flanges, hanger bars, spacers,
supports, plaster frames of nonferrous material or cadmium plated steel. Do not use painted steel
plaster frames.
2.14
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICE
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
14
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-
A.
Outdoor Photoelectric Switches
1.
Manufacturer: Watt Stopper
2.
Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA to operate connected
load, relay, or contactor coils; complying with UL 773.
Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc (16.14 to 108 lx), with an adjustment for turn-on
and turn-off levels within that range.
Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation.
Lightning Arrester: Air-gap type.
Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
C.
Lighting Contactor
1.
Description: Electrically operated and electrically held, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and
UL 508.
2.
Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including
tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total
harmonic distortion of normal load current).
3.
Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250.
Time Switches
1.
Product by Cooper Industries, Inc.; Intermatic, Inc.; Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.; NSi
Industries LLC; TORK Products or Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.
2.
Electronic Time Switches:
Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display;
complying with UL 917. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing
agency, and marked for intended location and application.
Contact Configuration: SPDT.
Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120-/240-V ac.
Programs: Eight on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule and an annual holiday schedule
that overrides the weekly operation on holidays.
Programs: Two on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for
each day of the week and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation
on holidays.
Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a
program on selected channels.
Astronomic Time: All channels.
Automatic daylight savings time changeover.
Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock.
Electromechanical-Dial Time Switches: Comply with UL 917.
Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.
Contact Configuration: SPDT.
Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120-/240-V ac.
Circuitry: Allows connection of a photoelectric relay as a substitute for the on-off function
of a program.
Astronomic time dial.
Eight-Day Program: Uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays.
Skip-a-day mode.
Wound-spring reserve carryover mechanism to keep time during power failures, minimum
of 16 hours.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
15
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-
D.
Occupancy Sensors
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Product by Hubbell Lighting; Light O Matic, Square D or Watt Stopper (The).
Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit.
Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and
off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum
range of 1 to 15 minutes.
Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A.
Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.
Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A
tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc,
150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.
Mounting:
a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.
b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch (13-mm) knockout in a standard
electrical enclosure.
Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.
Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal
operation of the sensor.
Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.
Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lx); keep lighting
off when selected lighting level is present.
Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a combination of PIR
and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology or
combination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the field by
operating controls on unit.
Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.
Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of any
portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm), and
detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm) in
either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305
mm/s).
Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area
of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. General: The electrical installation shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 70, “National
Electrical Code,” and to the requirements specified herein.
B. Wiring Method: The wiring method shall be as follows, except as otherwise noted.
1. Exterior:
a. Exposed: Rigid steel conduit.
b. Concealed: Rigid steel conduit.
1. In or under slab on grade: Nonmetallic conduit, Schedule 40 PVC. Conduit leaving
the slab (including exposed conduit riser) shall be rigid steel conduit.
2. Underground: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. Use Schedule 40 PVC. Provide concrete
encasement as indicated.
c. Connection to vibrating equipment, including transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic, or
electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit, maximum
length 18 inches.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
16
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-
2. Interior:
a. Exposed: Electrical metallic tubing.
1. Areas where exposed conduit may be subject to physical damage: Rigid metal
conduit.
2. Damp or wet locations: Rigid metal conduit.
3. Classified locations: Rigid metal conduit.
4. Feeders and subfeeders: Rigid metal conduit.
5. Aluminum type "SER" cable is approved for "apartment unit" load center feeders
where permitted by code.
b. Concealed: Electrical metallic tubing.
1. In or under slab on grade: Nonmetallic conduit, Schedule 40 PVC. Conduit leaving
the slab (including exposed conduit riser) shall be rigid steel conduit.
2. In slab, above grade: Rigid nonmetallic conduit Schedule 40 PVC. Maximum size
conduit in slab: 1 inch.
3. Non-metallic cable (NMC) shall be used for all interior "apartment unit" branch
circuiting where permitted by code.
c. Connection to vibrating equipment, including transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic, or
electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment: Flexible metal conduit, maximum length 18
inches.
1. For moist or humid locations or corrosive atmosphere, or where subject to water spray
or dripping oil, grease, or water: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
d. Connection to lighting fixtures located in suspended acoustical or metal ceilings: Flexible
metal conduit, maximum length 72 inches.
e. Final connections to lighting fixtures which have isolated junction boxes: Flexible metal
conduit.
1. Damp locations: Liquidtight flexible conduit.
C. Grounding and Bonding:
1. General: Grounding shall be provided in accordance with all applicable codes and regulations
of the State of California and the local authorities having jurisdiction.
2. An equipment grounding conductor shall be provided in all raceway containing phase
conductors.
3. The maximum resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms.
D. Raceway Installation:
1. General Requirements: Install electrical raceways in accordance with manufacturer’s written
installation instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, and as follows.
a. Minimum size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated.
b. Size conduits as indicated on the drawings and as required by the NEC for the number
and sizes of wires to be installed into the conduit.
c. Make conduit field cuts square with saw and ream out to full size. Shoulder conduits in
couplings. Remove burrs, and swab inside conduits before conductors are pulled in.
d. Make all conduit joints mechanically tight, electrically continuous, and watertight. Pitch
conduits in a manner to avoid creating moisture traps.
e. Install minimum 3/16" polypropylene pull cords from end-to-end in all empty raceways,
tagged with the identification of service intended and location of opposite end. Leave at
least 24 inches of pull cord at each end.
f. Restore wall, ceiling, and floor penetrations to the requirements of the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
17
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
g. Communications/Signal System Raceways 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to
the above requirements, install raceways 2-inch and smaller trade size in maximum
lengths at 150 feet and with a maximum of two, 90-degree bends or equivalent. Install pull
or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements.
h. Provide code sized green grounding conductor in all conduit.
Perform excavating, trenching, backfilling, and compacting as shown, and as specified in the
section in Division 2 which prescribes excavation, backfilling and compacting for utilities.
Minimum cover for runs below finished grade outside buildings: 24 inches except where
noted.
Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of conductors within
raceways.
a. Protect inside of conduit from dirt and rubbish during construction by capping all openings
with plastic caps intended for the purpose. Cap or plug conduits with standard
manufactured accessories as soon as the conduits have been permanently installed in
place.
Install all conduits at elevations and locations to avoid interference with grading or other work,
the structure, finished ceilings, walls. Avoid causing cutting of masonry structural members.
a. Do not place conduits in close proximity to equipment, systems, and service lines, such as
hot water supply and return lines, which could be detrimental to the conduit and its
contents. Maintain a minimum 3" separation, except in crossing, which shall be a
minimum 1".
1. Minimum separation from uninsulated hot water pipes, steam pipes, heater flues or
vents: 6 inches. Avoid running conduit directly under water lines.
2. Elevation of Raceway: Where possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water
and steam piping.
Conceal conduit, unless indicated otherwise, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. Keep
raceways at least six (6) inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes.
Install raceway level and square and at proper evaluations.
a. To prevent displacement, securely support and hold in place all conduits installed in
advance of other work and to be concealed in the building structure. Carefully lay out
conduits run within the structure, such as floors, beams, walls, to avoid densities
excessive for the construction. Relocate those conduits when excessive densities occur.
b. Run conduits embedded in structural slabs in the middle of the slab below the top and
above the bottom reinforcing steel. Minimum cover for conduit in concrete floors, walls or
roof: 1/3 thickness of slab, but in no case less than 1-1/2" cover except where penetration
is made. Do not install conduit larger than 1" in slabs. Tie raceways to reinforcing rods or
otherwise secure them to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. Space
raceways laterally to prevent voids in the concrete. Where nonmetallic conduit is used,
raceways must be converted to Schedule 80 or rigid steel conduit before rising above the
floor.
c. Where conduit installed in concrete or masonry extends across building construction
joints, provide expansion fittings as manufactured by O.Z.; Crouse-Hinds; Appleton; or
equal, with approved ground straps and clamps. Expansion fittings installed in concrete
shall be water tight, concrete tight, deflection/expansion type.
d. Run concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance
considering the type of building construction and obstructions except as otherwise
indicated. This does not apply to conduits in crawl spaces.
Install and neatly rack exposed conduits parallel with and perpendicular to building walls. Do
not install exposed diagonal conduit runs.
a. Run exposed, parallel, or banked raceways together. Make bends in parallel or banked
runs from the same center line so that the bends are parallel. Factory elbows may be
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
18
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-
7.
8.
9.
10.
used in banked runs only where they can be installed parallel. This requires that there be
a change in the plane of the fun such as from wall to ceiling and that the raceways be of
the same size. In other cases provide field bends for parallel raceways.
b. Use blockouts for concentrations of conduits in a confined area.
c. Route and suspend conduits crossing expansion joints to permit expansion, contraction,
and deflection utilizing approved fittings to prevent damage to the building, conduits, and
supporting devices.
d. Install exposed raceways parallel and perpendicular to nearby surfaces of structural
members and follow the surface contours as much as practical.
e. Provide conduit bodies for exposed conduit runs at junctions, bends or offsets where
required. Do not use elbows or bends around outside corners of beams, walls or
equipment. Make conduit body covers accessible.
Concrete Wall or Stab Penetrations: All core drilling, sleeves, blockouts or other penetrations
must be approved by the Structural Engineer prior to installation.
a. Space sleeves and core drills to insure a minimum dimension of 3 times the nominal trade
diameter of the largest adjacent conduit between sleeves or core drills.
b. Use blockouts for concentrations of conduits in a confined area.
Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight.
Where joints cannot be made tight, use bonding jumpers to provide electrical continuity of the
raceway system. Make raceway terminations tight. Where terminations are subject to
vibration, use bonding bushings or wedges to assure electrical continuity. Where subject to
vibration or dampness, use insulating bushings to protect conductors.
Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not effectively reduced. Unless otherwise
indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel.
a. Make no bends with a radius less than 12 times the diameter of the cable it contains nor
more than 90. Make field bends with tools designed for conduit bending. Heating of
metallic conduit to facilitate bending is not permitted.
b. Bends and offsets in 1" and smaller conduits may be done with approved bending devices.
Do not install conduits which have had their walls crushed and deformed and their surface
finish damaged due to bending.
c Run conduits parallel to and at right angles to building lines.
d. Where space conditions prohibit the use of standard ells, elbows, and conduits, use cast
ferrous alloy fittings of such forms and dimensions as best required for application.
Surface Raceway:
a. Install a separate green ground conductor in raceway from the junction box supplying the
raceway to receptacle of fixture ground terminals.
b. Select each surface raceway outlet box to which a lighting fixture is attached to be of
sufficient diameter to provide a seat for the fixture canopy.
c. Where a surface raceway is used to supply a fluorescent lighting fixture having central
stem suspension with a backplate and a canopy, with or without extension ring, the
backplate and canopy will serve as the outlet box and no separate outlet box need be
provided.
d. Provide surface raceway outlet box, in addition to the backplate and canopy, at the feed-in
location of each fluorescent lighting fixture having end stem suspension.
e. Where a surface raceway extension is made from an existing outlet box on which a
lighting fixture is installed, provide a backplate slightly smaller than the fixture canopy, and
no additional surface mounted outlet box need be installed.
f. Surface raceways shall be securely fastened to the mounting surface. Use expansion
type anchors in concrete.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
19
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-
11. Do not run conduits exposed on the roof unless approval is obtained from the Owner prior to
installation.
12. Other Requirements:
a. Connect motors, equipment containing motors, equipment mounted on an isolated
foundation, transformers, and other equipment and devices which are subject to vibration
and which require adjustment with liquidtight flexible metallic conduit from the device to the
conduit serving it. Size the flexible conduit length more than 12 diameters, but less than
18 diameters. Rigidly support the points of attachment on each side of the connection.
Use external bonding jumpers on sizes 1-1/2" and above.
b. Install escutcheons on all exposed conduits passing through interior floors, walls, or
ceilings. Install fire seals on all conduits passing through fire rated partitions. Install wall
and floor fire seals on all conduits passing through exterior walls and floors, or use
standard galvanized steel pipe sleeves; diameters 12" greater than the outside diameter of
the sleeved conduit and fill the annular space with mastic or caulk with lead.
c. Fire pump room: All wiring shall be installed in rigid metal, liquidtight flexible metal
conduit.
d. Raceway for panelboards:
1. All homeruns shown shall be run to the panel indicated independently of all other
homeruns. Provide pull points so as not to exceed total bends of 270.
2. Run a minimum of one 3/4-inch empty conduit for every three single pole spare circuit
breakers, spaces or fraction thereof and not less than two 3/4-inch conduits from every
flush mounted panel to an accessible space above the ceiling and below the floor.
e. Make conduit projections from covered areas to areas exposed to the weather watertight
by proper flashing. Extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches in all directions from conduit.
f. Cap conduits indicated to be stubbed-out underground using glued on PVC caps intended
for this purpose.
g. Install a coupling flush with the floor on all conduits stubbed-up through the floor slab.
h. Do not penetrate walls with flexible conduit where subject to physical damage. Use
recessed box with extension ring for transition from interior to exterior of wall.
i. Terminations:
1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the raceway to
enter squarely and install the locknuts with dished part against the box. Where
terminations cannot be made secure with one locknut, use two locknuts, one inside
and one outside the box.
2. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so
the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used,
align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase nipple so
no threads are exposed.
3. At switchboards, manholes and floor standing distribution panelboards, provide
insulated throat bushings or bell ends on all non-metallic conduit entries and bushings
on all metallic conduit entries.
4. Install insulated throat threaded hubs on conduits entering enclosures without
threaded hubs.
5. Install end bells on conduits stubbed through slabs and foundations into electrical
enclosures.
j. Install raceway sealing fittings in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions.
Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL Listed
sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install
raceway sealing fittings at the following points and elsewhere as indicated:
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
20
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-
1. Where conduits enter or leave hazardous locations.
2. Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as the boundaries of
refrigerated spaces and air conditioned spaces.
3. Where required by the NEC.
k. Stub-up Connections:
Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to
freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs and
set flush with the finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit;
flexible metal conduit may be used six (6) inches above the floor. Where equipment
connections are not made under this contract, install screwdriver operated threaded flush
plugs flush with floor.
1. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise from floor slabs. Arrange so that
curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab.
l. Flexible Connections: Use short length (maximum of 6 feet) of flexible conduit for
recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures, for equipment subject to vibration, noise
transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use liquidtight flexible conduit in wet
locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
m. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit:
1. Do not store conduit in direct sunlight.
2. Use pipe straps, no pipe wrenches or channel wrenches, when tightening connections
to avoid damaging PVC coating.
3. Patch all gouges or cuts in the PVC coating after installing conduit.
Use
manufacturer's recommended patching paste. Build up area to be patched to full mil
thickness of coating and feather out paste on sides of damaged area a minimum of
1/2-inch to provide a completely bonded seal.
4. Field bend conduit with shoes for a mechanical bender sized for the next larger size
conduit.
5. Bends used in or below concrete slabs shall be, rigid steel type elbows, use for all
stub-ups with flush floor coupling at transitions.
n. Use raceway fittings that are of types compatible with the associated raceway and suitable
for the use and location. For intermediate steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit
fittings except as otherwise indicated.
E.
1.
Panelboards, Lighting Control Panel, and Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers:
Factory Testing
a.
2.
3.
Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section.
All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards.
Installation
a.
The Contractors shall install all equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendations and
the contract drawings.
b.
All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by the
Contractor.
Field Testing
a.
Tests and Inspections:
1) Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
21
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-
2) Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3) Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a) Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, perform an infrared
scan on each section. Remove front panels so joints and connections are
accessible to portable scanner.
b) Instruments and Equipment - Use an infrared scanning device designed to
measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values.
Provide calibration record for device.
b.
Panelboards, lighting control panel and enclosed switches will be considered defective if
they do not pass tests and inspections.
c.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies meter
center included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
F. Installation of boxes and fittings:
1. Outlet boxes and Fittings: Install outlet and device boxes and associated covers and fittings of
materials and NEMA types suitable for each locations and in conformance with the following
requirements, except as otherwise indicated:
a. Interior dry locations: NEMA type 1, sheet steel.
1. In dry walls for single and two gang outlets provide 4S and 4D boxes, for 3 or more
outlets use masonry boxes.
2. In block and masonry walls provide masonry boxes of depths required for wall
thickness.
3. In poured concrete and plastered walls provide 4S and 4D boxes for single gang
outlets and 2G and 3G-5075 boxes for multiple ganged outlets.
4. In concrete ceilings provide OCR rings. In other ceilings provide 40 and 40D boxes.
Omit covers if standard canopy and device plates entirely cover the ceiling opening.
b. Locations exposed to weather or dampness: Cast metal, NEMA type 3R.
c. Wet locations: NEMA type 4 enclosures.
1. In exposed work, exterior of buildings, in wet location, and flush in non-waterproofed
walls below grade provide FS and FD boxes.
d. Corrosive locations: NEMA type 4X enclosures.
e. Hazardous (Classified) locations: Cast metal, UL 886, NEMA type listed and labeled for
the location and class of hazard indicated.
2. Pull and Junction Boxes: Install pull and junction boxes of materials and NEMA types as
follows, except as otherwise indicated:
a. Interior dry locations: NEMA type 1, sheet steel.
b. Locations exposed to weather or dampness: NEMA type 3R, sheet steel.
c. Wet locations: NEMA type 4 enclosures.
d. Corrosive locations: NEMA type 4X enclosures.
e. Hazardous (Classified) locations: Cast metal, UL 886, NEMA type listed and labeled for
the location and class of hazard indicated.
3. Floor Boxes: In slabs on grade and wet locations: Use NEMA type 4 boxes. At other
locations in slabs, use concrete-tight NEMA 1 boxes.
a. Provide floor boxes with quantity of gangs as required for power, communication or control
as indicated. Use boxes with barriers where required. Provide carpet flanges in carpeted
areas.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
22
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-
4. Hinged Door Enclosures: NEMA type 12, except as indicated.
5. Hinged Door Enclosures Outdoors: NEMA type 3R, with drip hood, factory tailored to
individual units.
6. Hinged Door Enclosures in Corrosive Locations: NEMA type 4X metal enclosure.
7. Cabinets: Flush mounted, NEMA enclosure type 1, except as otherwise indicated.
G. Lighting:
1. Inspect Architectural drawings and specifications, including ceiling alternates, to determine
ceiling material to be installed.
2. Inspect Architectural reflected ceiling plans.
3. Inspect installed ceiling components for defects affecting the quality and execution of work.
4. Preparation:
a. Verify ceiling material and alignment.
b. Lay out exact locations of fixtures in accordance with reflected ceiling plans, fixtures' and
switches' outlet boxes and supports.
c. Provide outlet boxes and conduit.
d. Provide appropriate hardware and fixture accessories to support from ceiling system.
5. Installation:
a. Installation of all lighting fixtures done by experienced electrician. Lighting fixtures not
installed where finished coat of paint has been applied to ceiling and walls until paint is
thoroughly dry. Verify ceiling type with architectural plan and provide all necessary
framing and mounting hardware.
b. Contractor to be responsible for proper coordination of all lighting fixture locations.
Provide support for all lighting fixtures mounted on or recessed in hung ceiling. Confer
with Ceiling Contractor and other trades to coordinate lighting systems.
c. Lighting fixtures to be rigidly mounted to fixture stud in outlet boxes. Malleable iron
hickeys or extension pieces provided where required.
d. Provide suitable coverplate or canopy for each lighting fixture outlet box where the lighting
fixture does not provide a suitable cover.
e. Lighting fixtures located on exterior of building installed with cadmium plated brass screws
and gasketed.
f. Lighting fixture to be installed in suspended T-Bar ceiling shall be attached to the ceiling
grid with an attachment device with a capacity capable to resist a force equal to the weight
of the light fixture acting in any direction. Lighting fixtures shall be supported directly from
the structure above by hangers capable of supporting the weight of the fixture with #12
galvanized steel wire from all 4 corners.
g. Verify all ceiling heights and clearances if mounting height is not indicated on plans or in
lighting fixture schedule, or if lighting fixture is relocated because of a conflict with another
trade. A mounting height for the lighting fixture is to be submitted for review.
h. Each lighting fixture completely wired in an approved manner with No. 14 AWG copper
stranded wire, 600 volt, with type SF-2 insulation; recessed lay-in lighting fixtures
furnished with 7 feet No. 14 SF wire and 6 feet Greenfield, 4 feet when installed in an air
plenum.
i. Circuit wiring running through the lighting fixtures to be No. 12 AWG with type SF
insulation. No joints in the wires other than those absolutely required. Provide wires of
sufficient length for making approved connections at the light outlets and at the
lampholders or ballasts.
j. Joints and splices within lighting fixtures to be either soldered and taped with plastic
electrician's tape or secured by wire nuts or indent type lug fasteners.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
23
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-
k.
Protect the lighting fixtures from damage during their unloading or removal, storage or
installation, any broken fixtures, lenses, etc., must be replaced with new parts, without any
additional expense to the Owner, undue delay or inconvenience.
l. Upon completion of the installation of the lighting fixtures and lighting equipment, they
must be in first-class operating order and in perfect condition as to finish, etc. Check for
proper operation and appearance, alignment of fixtures and proper placement of lenses,
louvers, lamps and other light-controlling or modifying appurtenances.
m. Where special lighting effects, flood or spotlighting is involved, perform final adjustment
under the direct supervision of Architect.
n. Cleaning: Immediately prior to occupancy, damp clean all lenses, lighting fixture trims,
reflectors, clean lamps or install new lamps as directed, with lenses and fixtures free of
labels.
o. Use of Lighting Fixtures: As soon as any portion of lighting fixture work is ready for
operation, the Owner shall have the right to operate the same under the supervision of the
Contractor. This shall in no way be interpreted to mean the acceptance of such part of the
installation or relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the complete work or any part
thereof.
p. Color and type of finish of all lighting fixtures as approved by the Architect.
q. Install fixtures and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
industry standard practice.
r. Coordinate work of this section with that of other trades.
s. Provide lighting fixtures, lamps, switches, and control systems, and wiring.
t. If designation omitted on drawings, provide same type fixture employed in rooms of similar
usage (contact this engineer for final direction).
u. Provide spacers for fixtures mounted on low density ceiling material.
v. Provide plaster frames for recessed fixtures in plaster ceilings.
w. Install fixtures in fiber decking and formboard so outlet boxes and openings will not be
sight exposed.
x. Prepare fixtures and trim required to be painted.
y. Outlet boxes locations on drawings are diagrammatic only. Position outlet boxes to
coincide with suspension hangers and knock-outs.
z. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, submittal data, and details on
drawings.
6. Adjustment and cleaning:
a. Adjust lamp positions for desired effects.
1. Adjust lamp positions for desired effects.
2. Align fixtures with building walls and tile joints.
b. Cleaning:
1. Remove dirt, grease, and foreign materials from fixtures.
2. Remove fingerprints, smudges, and dirt from fixtures' lenses and lamps.
H.
Lighting Control Devices
1. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas
indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
24
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-
3. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpowerlimited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
4. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless
otherwise indicated.
5. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
6. Identify components and power and control wiring.
7. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.
8. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each
sensor.
9. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Examine surfaces to which conduits are to be secured for:
1. Defects which will adversely affect the execution and quality of work.
2. Deviations from allowable tolerances for the building material.
B. Do not start work until defects and deviations are corrected.
3.3
CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installations of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; clear all blockages and
remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris.
3.4
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect inside of conduit from dirt and rubbish during construction by capping all openings with
plastic caps intended for the purpose.
B. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise from floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of
bends is not visible above the finished slab.
3.5
GROUNDING
A. Electrically ground metallic cabinets, boxes, and enclosures. Where wiring to item includes a
grounding conductor, provide a grounding terminal in the interior of the cabinet, box, or enclosure.
3.6
CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR
A. Upon completion of installation, inspect components. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris
and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, abrasions and weld marks. Clean surfaces
to be painted.
B. Galvanized finish: Repair damage using a zinc-rich paint recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Painted finish: Repair damage using matching corrosion-inhibiting touch-up coating.
END OF SECTION 26 0515
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CALIFORNIA
SHELTER LLP
25
APRIL 28, 2014
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
260515-
SECTION 27 15 00 - COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Pathways.
2.
UTP cabling.
3.
Coaxial cable.
4.
Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.
5.
Telecommunications outlet/connectors.
6.
Cabling system identification products.
7.
Cable management system.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical and Material Method” and “General Electrical
Requirements”
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and side rails.
B.
BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
C.
Channel Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of a one-piece, ventilated-bottom or
solid-bottom channel.
D.
Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from
building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways.
E.
Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection
or cross-connection.
F.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
G.
IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
H.
Ladder Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails connected by
individual transverse members (rungs).
I.
LAN: Local area network.
J.
MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of several
telecommunications outlet/connectors.
K.
Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet
cable terminates.
L.
RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
M.
Solid-Bottom or Non-ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of longitudinal
side rails and a bottom without ventilation openings.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
271500 -1
N.
Trough or Ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of longitudinal side rails and
a bottom having openings for the passage of air.
O.
UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4
HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION
A.
Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals
between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in
the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called
"permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols.
1.
TIA/EIA-568-B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlet/connectors
be installed for each work area.
2.
Horizontal cabling shall contain no more that one transition point or consolidation point
between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector.
3.
Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.
4.
Splitters shall not be installed as part of the optical fiber cabling.
B.
A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m), and includes the components that extend
from the telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station equipment.
C.
The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet (90 m). This maximum allowable
length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet (4.9 m) to the workstation
equipment. The maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16
feet (4.9 m) in the horizontal cross-connect.
1.5
A.
1.6
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in
TIA/EIA-568-B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.
For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used:
a.
Nominal OD.
b.
Minimum bending radius.
c.
Maximum pulling tension.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the
cabling and asset identification system of the software.
2.
Cabling administration drawings and printouts.
3.
Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following:
a.
Cross-connects.
b.
Patch panels.
c.
Patch cords.
4.
Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and
physical relationship between the installed components.
5.
Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding manufacturer's rating for
tray and its support elements.
C.
Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.
D.
Source quality-control reports.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
271500 -2
E.
Field quality-control reports.
F.
Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.
1.
Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings by an RCDD.
2.
Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Level 2
Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at
Project site.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2.
Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D.
Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.
E.
Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
1.8
A.
1.9
A.
1.10
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Test cables upon receipt at Project site.
1.
Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet
work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining
ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
construction period.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with
Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.
B.
Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at
each work area.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PATHWAYS
A.
General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.
B.
Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent
degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.
1.
Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.
2.
Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.
3.
Straps and other devices.
C.
Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
271500 -3
1.
2.2
A.
2.3
Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 3 inches (75
and 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) deep.
mm) high,
BACKBOARDS
Backboards: Plywood, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches (19 by 1220 by 2440 mm). Comply with
requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.
UTP CABLE
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:
1.
Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division.
2.
Berk-Tek; a Nexans company.
3.
CommScope, Inc.
4.
Draka USA.
5.
3M.
B.
Description: 100-ohm, Cat 5e, 4-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair, binder groups covered with a
blue thermoplastic jacket.
1.
Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.
2.
Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications.
3.
Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 5e.
4.
Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying
with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:
a.
Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG.
b.
Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262.
c.
Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262.
d.
Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR, complying with UL 1666.
2.4
UTP CABLE HARDWARE
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:
1.
American Technology Systems Industries, Inc.
2.
Hubbell Premise Wiring.
3.
Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc.
4.
Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.
5.
Panduit Corp.
6.
Siemon Co. (The).
B.
General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC
type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with
connecting hardware of same category or higher.
C.
Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and
permit interconnection between cables.
1.
Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.
D.
Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors
at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.
1.
Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated.
E.
Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with
integral IDC-type terminals.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
271500 -4
F.
2.5
Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 36-inch (900 mm) lengths; terminated with
eight-position modular plug at each end.
1.
Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.
COAXIAL CABLE
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:
1.
Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division.
2.
Coleman Cable, Inc.
3.
Draka USA.
B.
Cable Characteristics: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for
broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm
nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz.
C.
RG-6/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM.
1.
No. 16 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.
2.
Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 60 percent aluminum braid.
3.
Jacketed with black PVC or PE.
4.
Suitable for indoor installations.
2.6
COAXIAL CABLE HARDWARE
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:
1.
Leviton Voice & Data Division.
2.
Siemon Co. (The).
B.
Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms.
2.7
TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS
A.
Jacks: Cat 5e, 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular.
Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
B.
Workstation Outlets: Two or Four-port-connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate.
1.
Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Division 16 Section "Wiring
Devices."
2.
For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical fiber, and
coaxial work area cords.
3.
Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.
4.
Legend: Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label.
5.
Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.
2.8
RESIDENTIAL MAIN MEDIA DISTRIBUTION CABINET
A.
The enclosure shall be completely modular. The enclosure shall be structured to support voice,
data and video using hubs with the following capabilities:
1.
Phone distribution hubs shall manage four incoming lines and distribute service to eight
outlets. The phone distribution hub shall have test ports for both the incoming and
outgoing connection to ensure proper performance of every phone system. The phone
distribution hub shall contain a built in security system interface capable of overriding
phone service to transmit safety alarms in the event of an emergency. The phone
distribution hub shall facilitate service expansion without using additional space within the
base of the enclosure.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
271500 -5
2.
3.
4.
5.
Cat 5e data hub shall have six ports and offer 110 punchdown terminations, which shall
be positioned on the front of the hub. The category 5e data hub shall facilitate service
expansion without using additional space within the base of the enclosure.
Passive video splitters shall be 1 GHz or 2GHz.
A cable management kit shall be available to help organize and route the cables in the
enclosure
A grounding kit shall be available with the necessary components to properly ground the
installation
B.
The enclosure shall have a dual directional-hinged door allowing for the door to open to the left
or to the right.
C.
The door of the enclosure shall have a locking mechanism.
D.
The enclosure shall provide means to securely hold third party equipment, such as routers or
switches.
2.9
GROUNDING
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding” for grounding conductors and
connectors.
B.
Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
2.10
IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.
Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating
adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
B.
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
2.11
CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A.
Document physical characteristics by recording the network, TIA/EIA details, and connections
between equipment and cable.
B.
Information shall be presented in database view.
2.12
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
B.
Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
C.
Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WIRING METHODS
A.
Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets,
desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.
1.
Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.
2.
Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26 Section
"Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
B.
Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where
possible.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
271500 -6
C.
3.2
Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess and
without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and
distribution spools.
INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A.
Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A-7.
B.
Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in this
section. Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings.
C.
Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends
between pull points.
D.
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems"
for installation of conduits and wireways.
E.
Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.
F.
Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms:
1.
Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood
is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed
around perimeter walls of room.
2.
Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.
3.
Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead.
4.
Extend conduits 3 inches (76 mm) above finished floor.
5.
Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to
grounding system.
G.
Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch (2440-mm) dimension vertical. Butt adjacent
sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners and joints.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF CABLES
A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
General Requirements for Cabling:
1.
Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2.
Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."
3.
Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
4.
MUTOA shall not be used as a cross-connect point.
5.
Consolidation points may be used only for making a direct connection to
telecommunications outlet/connectors:
a.
Do not use consolidation point as a cross-connect point, as a patch connection,
or for direct connection to workstation equipment.
b.
Locate consolidation points for UTP at least 49 feet (15 m) from communications
equipment room.
6.
Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations
only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.
7.
Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30
inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings,
outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
8.
Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent
bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
271500 -7
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling
Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged
during installation and replace it with new cable.
Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat
lamps shall not be used for heating.
In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- (3-m-) long service loop on
each end of cable.
Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull
tensions.
C.
UTP Cable Installation:
1.
Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
2.
Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) from the point of termination to
maintain cable geometry.
D.
Outdoor Coaxial Cable Installation:
1.
Install outdoor connections in enclosures complying with NEMA 250, Type 4X. Install
corrosion-resistant connectors with properly designed O-rings to keep out moisture.
2.
Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 36 inches
(915 mm).
E.
Separation from EMI Sources:
1.
Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A for separating unshielded copper voice
and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power
lines and equipment.
2.
Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and
unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a.
Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).
b.
Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300
mm).
c.
Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (610
mm).
3.
Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and
unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a.
Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64
mm).
b.
Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150
mm).
c.
Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300
mm).
4.
Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power
lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall
be as follows:
a.
Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
b.
Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches (76
mm).
c.
Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150
mm).
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
271500 -8
5.
6.
3.4
Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5
kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm).
Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5
inches (127 mm).
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
B.
Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C.
Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
3.5
GROUNDING
A.
Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection"
Chapter.
B.
Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
C.
Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall
allowing at least 2-inch (50-mm) clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding
bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to
suitable electrical building ground.
D.
Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG
equipment grounding conductor.
3.6
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with
requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
B.
Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards.
For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.
C.
Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List
incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with
rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive
schedules for Project.
D.
Cable and Wire Identification:
1.
Label each cable within 4 inches (100 mm) of each termination and tap, where it is
accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.
2.
Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at
device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within
panel or cabinet.
3.
Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at
intervals not exceeding 15 feet (4.5 m).
4.
Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.
a.
Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify
each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a buildingmounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as
shown.
b.
Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.
5.
Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label
each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
APRIL 28, 2014
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
271500 -9
6.
E.
3.7
Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling,
use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.
Uniquely identify and label work area cables extending from the MUTOA to the work
area. These cables may not exceed the length stated on the MUTOA label.
Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that
contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A.
1.
Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification
markings.
Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for
compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for
compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2.
Visually confirm Category 5e, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and
patch panels.
3.
Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment
and patch cords, and labeling of all components..
C.
UTP Performance Tests:
1.
Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2:
a.
Wire map.
b.
Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements).
c.
Insertion loss.
d.
Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss.
e.
Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss.
f.
Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT).
g.
Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT).
h.
Return loss.
i.
Propagation delay.
j.
Delay skew.
2.
Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP systems after the complete
communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.
3.
Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect to
the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen and receive
a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and
digital subscription line telephone call.
4.
Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network
installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at
the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network.
D.
Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary
report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument
to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
E.
End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
10
APRIL 28, 2014
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
271500 -
3.8
A.
DEMONSTRATION
Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including changing
signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping
records of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new
workstation outlets.
END OF SECTION 27 1500
OAKMONT GARDENS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS
SANTA ROSA, CA
SHELTER LLP
11
APRIL 28, 2014
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
271500 -